JP6451056B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. Variation effect is a demonstration that sphere ball entrance opening is initiated by Rukoto be ball entrance, for example, the effective three horizontally or vertically in the display area, or 3 × squares are a total of nine symbols, etc. 3 displaying, by scrolling images, etc. to be displayed based on a predetermined game condition, when the scrolling stops, generating an equivalent or if the stop symbols are a combination predetermined in the predetermined stop position It is something to be made.

Further, during the scrolling of the symbol or the like, sometimes advantageous gaming state (e.g., those Tari) for the player interest effect suggests that a pre (e.g., effects by the reach display, etc.) is performed, advantageously The game has also been designed to give players a sense of expectation for new games. Furthermore, the effects by the reach display, not only suggest that the person Tari, the stop symbol when scrolling is stopped, after those have enough, the probability of those Tari becomes high probability (high probability state) There is also a gaming machine where an effect is made to expect or not.

JP 2008-272159 A

In the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that in a high probability state, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that a game becomes monotonous and a player gets bored of the game at an early stage. .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a determination unit capable of executing determination, a display unit for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a display thereof. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the means, and a dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set The dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the establishment of the change condition from the storage means storing a plurality of and the plurality of dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means When the group type changing means for changing the dynamic display period group and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Bonus game execution means, Yes After serial privilege game is executed, the first detector capable of detecting the game balls based on the game ball is detected, a special state setting means for setting a special condition to be advantageous to the player, the And when the special state is set, there is a variable means that is variable according to a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the variable means is a game ball detected by the first detection unit. Is formed so that the game ball held by the holding portion can be moved from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding portion. In the gaming machine, after the gaming ball moved to the second position in the state where the special state is set rolls out of the holding unit and the gaming ball is detected, the dynamic information of the identification information When the display is stopped, the special status A normal state setting means capable of setting a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the dynamic display period group stored in the storage means is shorter than other dynamic display period groups A short dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period is easily determined is set.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the display means are displayed. A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the identification information and a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining unit are set are stored. The dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit based on the establishment of the change condition from the storage unit and the plurality of dynamic display period groups stored in the storage unit. A group type changing means for changing a display period group, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; The bonus game is executed After being has a first detector capable of detecting the game balls based on the game ball is detected, a special state setting means for setting a special condition to be advantageous to the player, and the special state Is set , the variable means is variable according to the dynamic display period of the identification information, and the variable means causes the first detection unit to detect the game ball detected at the first position. A holding portion that can be held is formed, and the game ball held by the holding portion is configured to be movable while being held by the holding portion from the first position to the second position. In a state where the special state is set, the game ball moved to the second position rolls out of the holding unit, and after the game ball is detected, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed. In the event that the player Normal state setting means capable of setting a normal state, and a dynamic display period shorter than other dynamic display period groups is determined for the dynamic display period group stored in the storage means A group of short dynamic display periods that are easily set is set.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the display means is composed of a liquid crystal display .

Therefore, there is an effect that various display modes can be displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a mimetic diagram of a probable character arranged in a game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) shows the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus when double reach is materialized. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in a main controller, (b) showed typically the various data stored in ROM in a main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main controller, various reservation ball storage areas, and various reservation ball execution areas. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (c) is the variation pattern table for jackpots FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 9E is a diagram of a variation (probability) variation pattern table. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the operation | movement of the probability variable thing arrange | positioned in the game board of a pachinko machine, (a) is a schematic diagram immediately after the start of probability change, (b) is the schematic diagram in process of probability change. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram just before the end of probability variation. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle of the probabilistic actor arranged in the game board of the pachinko machine and the time from the start of the probabilistic change, and (a) is a schematic diagram in the case of not hitting big during the probable change. Yes, (b) is a schematic diagram when a big hit is made during probability change, (c) is a schematic diagram when two spheres enter a probability variable, and (d) is during the probability change. It is a schematic diagram when the probability variation body of the probability variation is stopped. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the probability change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change completion | finish schedule process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the probability change completion | finish process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change period progress process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the angle of the probability variable character object arrange | positioned in the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, and the time from a probability change start, (a) is a fluctuating effect during probability change. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is ROM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots in 3rd Embodiment, (b) showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for losing in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the relationship between the elapsed time from the probability change start in 3rd Embodiment, and the total value of "probability change period progress point number". It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change period progress process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change possibility determination start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probable change possible determination end process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change possible determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in the main controller in 5th Embodiment, (b) is ROM in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern table AE for deviation in 5th Embodiment, (b) shows typically an example of the switching selection table in 5th Embodiment. (C) is the figure which showed typically the small hit random number table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
<Pachinko machine 10>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is associated with entering a first entrance 64 (start-start prize) to be described later. Various effects, such as fluctuating effects and reach effects, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “sea stage” with a motif of the shallow sea, a “palace stage” with a submarine palace as a motif, a “deep sea stage” with a deep sea as a motif are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the changing effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  In addition, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off. Note that while the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, a ball is continuously fired at predetermined time intervals (for example, one ball is fired every 0.6 seconds).

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display unit 80 The probable character 700 (see FIG. 4) and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ab which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Aa. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba has a probability change (during a high probability gaming state) in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than normal, or the jackpot winning probability is normal. Although the probability of winning is low, the probability of winning the jackpot is low, and the drawing probability of the first symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to a higher probability than normal. Whether the probability is set to the normal low probability during normal (in normal probability gaming state) by lighting state, whether it is changing (in dynamic display) by lighting state, Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a dismissed symbol is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Aa and 37Bb displays the number of rounds or an error that is a big hit. In addition, LED37Ab and 37Ba are comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The combination of the light emission color may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LEDs. it can.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to having entered into the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Ab and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when a game ball enters the electric tulip 702 of the probability transformation object 700 and the probability variation occurrence switch 703 (see FIG. 4) detects the game ball. . The entry to the electric tulip 702 is limited unless it is determined that a high probability state is to be given, that is, execution of “15R probability variation jackpot” or “4R probability variation jackpot” is determined. ing. Therefore, since the case where the probability change is generated is determined in a controllable manner, it is possible to suppress the problem that the euphoria becomes extremely high.

  When execution of “15R probability variation jackpot” or “4R probability variation jackpot” is determined, a probability variation start schedule flag 203m (see FIG. 7A) described later is turned on. When the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects a game ball, the probability variation is configured on condition that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on. Therefore, even when a game ball is illegally entered into the electric tulip 702, it is possible to suppress a problem that probability change occurs.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that gives a player a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 after a maximum of 15 rounds. is there. The “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot given to a player with a special privilege that allows a ball to enter the electric tulip 702 after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. Further, when execution of “15R probability variation jackpot” or “4R probability variation jackpot” is determined, the probability variation start flag 203m is set to ON, a game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the probability variation occurrence switch 703 plays the game. Probability is set based on detecting the sphere.

  On the other hand, in the “15R normal jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds is a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) after a maximum of 15 rounds, but a game ball can enter the electric tulip 702. As for the privilege which becomes, probability change start schedule flag 203m is not set to ON.

  In addition, “probability change (high probability gaming state)” means a state in which the jackpot probability of the lottery performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered is increased. In other words, it is a game state that is easy to shift to the special game state (big hit). Although details will be described later, in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state period) in the present embodiment, the probability variation end switch 707 of the probability variation object 700 detects the game ball and then the probability variation end switch 707 detects the game ball. It is a period until.

  On the other hand, the “low probability gaming state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Further, the “low probability gaming state” includes a short time state (short time medium) and a normal state. In the “low probability game state”, the game is easy for the ball to easily enter the second entrance 640 with the hit probability of the second symbol being increased while the jackpot probability remains low. It means a state. On the other hand, the normal state of the “low probability state” is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) that is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  Although details will be described later, during probability change and time shortening, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than normal, and is associated with the second entrance 640. The time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the electric combination 640a is opened per unit is not limited to changing the opening time of the electric combination 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the probability change or the short time. It is also possible to make changes that increase. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 passing through the sphere as a trigger. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display two symbols. The number of passes of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and a second symbol holding lamp 84 that lights and displays the number of held balls is below the third symbol display device 81. Are arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first symbol display device 37A, A decorative display corresponding to the display of 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device of the third symbol.

  In this way, by displaying the third symbol that is dynamically displayed in accordance with the display of the first symbol, the third symbol is not displayed even during the period in which the first symbol must continue the dynamic display. It is possible to display characters and the like, display a reduced scale, or temporarily stop the display. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the same lottery result as the first symbol, so that the player can be notified of the lottery result of the first symbol in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the first symbol, the third symbol is displayed as a symbol indicating a lottery result different from the lottery result information of the first symbol (for example, a symbol indicating a normal jackpot if the probability variation big hit). By configuring so as to notify that a promising big hit is made during the jackpot game, the player can be expected to make a transition to the probable change state even during the big hit game.

<Configuration of the probable character 700>
Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the structure of the probability variation | change object 700 arrange | positioned at the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a probable character 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. The probability variable object 700 includes a through switch 701, an electric tulip 702, a blocking portion 702b, and a probability variable rotator 704.

  The through switch 701 is a switch that triggers whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the through switch 701, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened when the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m (see FIG. 7) is turned on (FIG. 7). 16 (see S203).

  The method of opening the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and a lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric tulip 702 based on the ball entering the through switch 701 is also possible. Good. For example, when the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery is acquired based on the ball entering the through switch 701 and the value is 7, for example, the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is turned on or off. Regardless, the electric tulip 702 may be opened. With this configuration, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be transitioned to probability variation without winning the probability variation jackpot, so that the range of game play can be expanded.

  Further, the electric tulip 702 is configured to be opened for a certain period based on the determination that “15R probability variation big hit” or “4R probability variation big hit” is given without providing the through switch 701. May be. In this case, the game may be released from the time when the first symbol is stopped until the jackpot game is started, during a predetermined period during the jackpot game, or during a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends. Conceivable.

  The electric tulip 702 includes an electric accessory 702a, a probability change generation switch 703, a path 703a, and a path outlet 703b. The electric accessory 702a has a pair of blade members arranged facing each other with a width that allows one game ball to pass. The blade member is normally held in a vertically upright state. The blocking portion 702b is arranged at an opening position where the game ball formed by the standing blade member can enter, and prevents (inhibits) the game ball from entering the electric tulip 702. When a game ball enters the through switch 701 with the probability variation start schedule flag 203m turned on, the blade member rotates about 45 degrees in the direction in which the tips of the blades are separated from each other, and the game enters the electric tulip 702. The sphere can be changed to a possible state.

  A game ball that has entered the electric tulip 702 flows down a path 703b formed in the electric tulip 702, and is detected by a probability change generation switch 703 provided at the end of the path 703b. This probability change generation switch 703 is a magnetic field detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and detects the passage of the game ball by changing the magnetic field as the game ball passes.

  When a game ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703, if the probability change start scheduled flag 203m is on, the gaming state is set to a high probability gaming state (probability changing). In other words, the probability change occurrence switch 703 is a switch that triggers the setting of a high-probability gaming state.

  The electric accessory 702a is always set in an upright state (a state where the electric tulip is closed) except that the electric accessory 702a is opened with the entry of the through switch 701. When the electric accessory 702a is rotated (the electric tulip 702 is opened), a game ball enters the electric tulip 702, and the game ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703. Then, the electric accessory 702a is turned upright (the electric tulip 702 is closed) (see S205 in FIG. 16).

  Moreover, the method of closing the electric tulip 702 is not limited to this, and the electric tulip 702 may be configured to be closed when the opening is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In the case of opening, closing and opening may be repeated a predetermined number of times every predetermined period.

  The probability variation generation switch 703 is a switch for detecting the entrance of a sphere. When the entrance of a sphere is detected by the probability change generation switch 703, the probability change is set (generated) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see S206 in FIG. 16).

  In the vertical direction of the probability change generation switch 703, there are a cylindrical path 703a and a path outlet 703b, which connect the electric tulip 702 and the probability variable accessory case 705. The path 703a is made of a material that allows the inside to pass therethrough, and a sphere inside the path 703a can be visually recognized.

  The probability variation rotator 704 includes a probability variation rotator motor 704a, a ball receiving portion 704b, a probability variation accessory case 705, a ball discharge portion 706, a probability variation end switch 707, a path 707a, and a path outlet 707b.

  The probability variation rotor motor 704 is pivotally supported at the center of the ball receiver 704b and rotates the ball receiver. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the ball receiving portion 704b is formed with a concave portion into which a single game ball can enter a part of a cylindrical outer shape. Normally, the ball receiving portion 704b is arranged in a state in which the concave portion is directed vertically upward by the probability variation rotating body motor 704 (a state in which the game ball discharged from the path outlet 707b can be received by the concave portion). When a game ball enters the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b, the ball receiving portion 704b is rotated by the probability variation rotating body motor 704, and when the concave portion moves to the position of the ball discharge portion 706, the game entering the concave portion The sphere is configured to flow into the path 707a from the sphere discharge portion 706.

  In the middle of the path 707a, a probability change end switch 707 is arranged so that a game ball can be detected. The game ball detected by the probability change end switch 707 further flows down the path 707a and is then discharged from the path exit 707b.

  Here, the probability variation rotor motor 704a will be described in more detail. The probability variation rotating body motor 704a is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver. The stepping motor is controlled by outputting a predetermined command capable of designating at least a target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), rotation direction, and rotation speed from the MPU 201 to the motor driver. In the motor driver, the target angle specified from the MPU 201 is more than one step of the stepping motor with respect to the current angle of the stepping motor (for example, one rotation is equivalent to 0.36 degrees in the case of one rotation with 1000 pulses). If so, a predetermined number of pulses are output to the stepping motor in accordance with the designated rotation direction and rotation speed. In addition, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability variation rotor motor 704a (stepping motor) from the motor driver. Since the maximum clock frequency of the motor driver is equal to or greater than 2 milliseconds (= 500 Hz), which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process of the MPU 201 (for example, 5 MHz), 2 mm which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process of the MPU 201 A stepping motor can be controlled by outputting a predetermined command to the motor driver every second.

  The probability variation rotating body motor 704a is operated by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see S702 in FIG. 22), so that the ball received in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b is connected to the probability variation end switch 707 that triggers the probability variation end. It leads to the sphere discharge part 706 which is.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed in the probability change period progress process (see FIG. 22) in S702 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) in S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). Every 2 milliseconds, which is the interval, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise (at the same angle each time) by “angle AX” (see FIG. 22). In other words, the ball that is retained in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704 b is moved to the ball discharging portion 706 by rotating the ball receiving portion 704 b at a constant speed by the probability changing rotor motor 704 a of the probability changing rotor 704. Then, the game ball discharged from the ball discharge unit 706 is detected by the probability change end switch 707, so that the lottery probability is set to shift from the high probability to the low probability. That is, the probability variation period is set by the time (period) during which the probability variation 704 rotates. The “angle AX” will be described later.

  Hereinafter, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b faces vertically upward (a state in which the concave portion 704b is positioned below the path outlet 703b) is referred to as a state in which the probability variation rotator 704 is “angle A1”. In addition, a state in which the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap is described as a state in which the probability variation rotator 704 is at the “angle A2”. Furthermore, the clockwise angle from the state of “angle A1” to the state of “angle A2” of the probability variation rotator 704 is referred to as “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704”. In the present embodiment, “the angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees.

  The probability variable accessory case 705 is formed of a cylindrical case body that surrounds the probability variable rotator 704 and can visually recognize the probability variable rotator 704 inside. Since the probable accessory case 705 is made of a material that is permeable to the inside, the game ball received in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the cylindrical side surface of the probable agent case 705 is not provided with an opening other than the opening through which the game ball from the route exit 703b through which the game ball entering the electric tulip 702 flows down can pass. Thus, it is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b. The probable accessory case 705 is configured such that when a game ball enters the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b, the ball receiving portion 704b can rotate while the game ball enters the concave portion. In addition, the inner side wall surface is disposed at a distance that prevents the game ball from coming out of the recess from the recess. Thereby, even if the ball receiving portion 704b is rotated to a position where the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b is directed vertically downward, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball is exposed to the outside from the concave portion.

  The ball discharge portion 706 is a discharge port for discharging the ball received in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b to the outside of the probable character 700. The ball discharge unit 706 is a hole provided in the game board 13 and is connected to a path 707 a provided with a probability change end switch 707. Since the lower part of the sphere receiving part 704b is inclined in the direction of the sphere discharging part 706, when the sphere receiving part 704b and the sphere discharging part 706 overlap, the sphere in the sphere receiving part 704b is It is discharged from the ball discharge unit 706.

  The probability variation end switch 707 is set to the end of probability variation based on the detection of the ball entering by the probability variation end switch 707 (see S404 in FIG. 19). A cylindrical path 707a is provided in the vertical direction of the probability change end switch 707, and connects the ball discharge portion 706 and the path outlet 707b. The ball that has passed through the route outlet 707b is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10.

  The probability changing role 700 of the pachinko machine 10 is a role for setting the start and end of the probability change. The start of probability change is set when the ball enters the probability change occurrence switch 703, and the end of probability change is set when the ball enters the probability change end switch 707. The sphere that has passed the probability change generation switch 703 is stopped in the concave portion of the ball receiving portion 704b, guided to the sphere discharge portion 706 connected to the probability change end switch 707, and then passes through the probability change end switch 707. . As the longest period in which the probability change is set, the probability change occurrence switch 703 detects the game ball and the probability change start is set, and then the game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707 and the probability change end is set. Therefore, it is a period until the probability change ends without making a big hit in the probability change period. The longest period in which this probability change is set is referred to as “the maximum probability change period”. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the “probable longest period” is about 361 seconds when only one sphere enters the probable agent 700.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when probability variation is set, the probability variation remaining time can be determined by the probability variation object 700, so that the player is made aware of the remaining time of the probability variation period. It is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the effective line setting. FIG. 5B is a view showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when so-called double reach is established.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display region Dm that displays the third symbol variably over almost the entire area of the screen. In addition, in the lower center of the main display area Dm, the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are reserved. A hold display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

  The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm includes 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, and It is composed of one type of sub-pattern (in this embodiment, a picture of a shell) that is smaller than the main symbol. These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is detected, the big winning lottery is performed, and the third symbol display is performed together with the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the apparatus 81, the 3rd symbol variation effect (dynamic effect) is executed. The variation effect (dynamic effect) is performed so that the main symbol and the sub symbol are scrolled (rightwardly scrolled) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity for each symbol row. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). . Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. In addition, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In the pachinko machine 10, if a combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 at the time of stopping the fluctuating effect of scrolling horizontally in each game, the jackpot A jackpot video is displayed.

  That is, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the variable effect ends. After that, it is configured to generate a jackpot. When it is possible to enter a ball into the probability change occurrence switch 703 (see FIG. 4) after the big hit (when it is easier to enter the ball than usual) (in the case of a positive change big hit), the main number corresponding to the odd number A variation effect in which symbols (corresponding to “probability variation”) are arranged is performed.

  In the case of the probable big hit, the probable change start scheduled flag 203m that permits entry into the probable actor 700 is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23), so that the electric tulip 702 is passed by the game ball passing through the through switch 701. Is opened, and a game ball can enter the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are aligned. In the case of a normal jackpot, the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not turned on (is kept off). That is, the electric tulip 702 is not set in the open state even if the game ball passes through the through switch 701, and the game ball cannot enter the electric tulip.

  The variation effect is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. In the case where it is determined that the reach has been established, a screen for notifying that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 for the sound indicating the reach (see FIG. 5). ) Is output. Here, “reach” represents a state in which, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot may be generated depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbol are displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 5B, at the stage where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left and middle symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are displayed.・ The 3rd row of 3rd symbols on the right may be reversed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5B, the main symbol (Dugong) “7”, the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (shark) “6” are arranged in order from the left in the upper symbol row Z1. In the lower symbol row Z1, the main symbol (shark) of “6”, the sub symbol (shellfish), and the main symbol (Dugong) of “7” are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. And the arrangement of the third symbol is reversed.

  In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 becomes the main symbol (shark) of “6”, the main symbol (6) on the effective line L4 ( Shark), that is, since the normal symbols, which are the main symbols corresponding to the even symbols, are aligned, it usually becomes a big hit, and after the big hit ends, it shifts to a low probability state and becomes a short time state. On the other hand, if the middle symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Dugon) of “7”, it is the main symbol (Dugon) of “7” on the effective line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probability variation symbols are aligned, the probability variation jackpot is achieved, and the ball easily enters the probability variation occurrence switch 703 (see FIG. 4) of the probability variation role 700 after the jackpot is completed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 5 (b) may be a big hit on the two active lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, both the normal jackpot and the probable big hit This is a possible state, that is, a “double reach” state in which two reach is established.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can establish double reach in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, it is simply a single reach (a reach that indicates the possibility of a big hit only on one active line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed). In comparison, the player can be expected to have a higher chance of winning the game. Further, it is possible to make the player have more complicated feelings such as whether it is a probable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether it is a probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, and it is out of place. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  The hold display area Db is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. It is. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), The number of entrances is held up to 4 times for entering the first entrance 64, and up to 4 times for entering the second entrance 640. The total number of reserved balls at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and also in the hold display area Db.

  In the holding display area Db, one holding ball number symbol (the ● symbol in FIGS. 5 (a) and (b)) is displayed for each holding ball number, and depending on the display number of the holding ball number symbol, holding is made. The number of balls is displayed. That is, if one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the hold display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and if eight reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates that there are 8 balls. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the hold display area Db, it indicates that the number of held balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Similarly, in the case of entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may do it. In addition, the maximum number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 are not limited to the same number of times and are different. The number of times may be set. For example, the maximum number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be set to 4 times, and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 may be set to 2 times.

  Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Db, the number of reserved balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into one or more is the same as the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. If the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or the time reduction, the second entrance is also during the probability change or the time reduction, such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When it is in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter 640, the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the left of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. ing. In addition, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of passages of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 of the sphere is retained up to a total of 4 times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol. The hold lamp 84 is also turned on.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the second symbol display device 83. A part of the three-symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are calculated. Although configured in the same way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entrance to the first entrance 64 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a first jackpot stop pattern is set. The LED 37Ab of the symbol display device 37A is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second winning hole 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big win lottery performed due to the entrance to the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, the first big win will be stopped. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 650a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable prize-winning device 65 and the second variable prize-winning device 650 have a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a front side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The special winning openings 65a and 650a are normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that can be opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED 37Ab and LED 37Ba corresponding to the big hit are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are A predetermined opening is provided for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major winning lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 has a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Reservation ball number counter 203e, ordinary figure retention ball number counter 203f, ordinary figure retention ball storage area 203i, ordinary figure retention ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag 203k, probability change flag 203l, probability change start schedule flag 203m, probability change character It includes at least a ball counter 203n, a probability variation period memory 203o, a probability variation period measurement counter 203p, and a probability variation end scheduled flag 203q.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d.

  Further, in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute main processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in ROM 202, and various storage balls stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used for the main controller 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used by the MPU 201 of the system.

  As each counter, a first per-random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery of the first symbol, a first per-type counter C2 used for jackpot symbol selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, the second hit random number counter C4 used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second hit A second initial value random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 is set. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Although details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The stored special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the special figure reservation ball storage area 203b. Stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number for the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. A first per-random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball is won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a game state for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) having a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. By differentiating the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300 (= 3/900).

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” of the “gaming state” It is stored in the random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30 (= 30/900).

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, there is a duplicate value between the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state”. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. As in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, the value of the random number that is a big hit is predicted. Since it can be made difficult to be done, fraud can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball in the RAM 203 together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect or the type of stop symbol (hereinafter “stop type”) Will be the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  The jackpot type is “15R probable jackpot”, which allows the ball to enter the electric tulip 702 that triggers the transition to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds as described above, the maximum round "15R normal jackpot" that becomes short-time state for 100 fluctuation times of low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, electric tulip that triggers transition to high probability state after jackpot of maximum round of 4 rounds There is a “4R probable big hit” that makes it easy to enter a ball into 702.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second pitch The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table for the “first entrance” is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type becomes a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second entrance 640 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the type of the big win is a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1 / 4R (25/100) with a probability of 4R.

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in any reserved area of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of departure. The

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the variation pattern, and is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 in FIG. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas.

  The MPU 201 uses a variation type counter CS1, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C) and a deviation variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 9D to 9E) stored in the ROM 202, so-called normal reach. , Change patterns such as super reach and special reach. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table 202d used at the time of loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the deviation variation pattern table 202d includes a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 that is selected when the gaming state is a normal low-probability state other than a short-duration time, and a short-term or probable variation. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 to be selected is set.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  Further, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number that is a big hit (that is, if it is a random number that falls outside), the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time The fluctuation pattern is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 based on the value of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1. Further, when the gaming state is in a short time or in the probability change, the variation pattern is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

  Here, various types of normal reach are fluctuation patterns having a short fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and are fluctuation patterns in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a short reach. The various types of super reach are fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds and longer than normal reach types, and the first symbol (or third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, reach that develops from long reach or normal reach). ). Special reach types are fluctuation patterns that have a longer variation time of 90 seconds than the super reach types, and the reach that takes the longest time (for example, the reach that develops after the super reach or the destination from the normal reach is the super reach) This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c represents a variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 to 198 for various types of special reach.

  By selecting various types of super reach and special reach with a long variation time as the variation pattern, the expectation that will be a big hit will be greatly expanded while the variation production by various types of super reach and special reach is performed. Can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state (normal, short-running, probability change), but for each gaming state, The correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  Next, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. One reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that deviates, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area as the first random number counter C1 In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a short lapse where the change ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long lapse that is longer than the short deviation (10 seconds) but the reach is not established, Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for short deviation and 99 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, for reach, the reach is established, but the normal reach is as short as 30 seconds, the super reach is 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and the super reach is 90 seconds. There are various special reach types, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 149 for normal reach types, 150 to 197 for various super reach types, and 198 for various special reach types.

  FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (e), the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of separation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when full-reach only with short-running and long-off, and when reach other than front-rear reach and front-rear out-of-reach is determined, and common reach with various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach, etc. The groups are divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  One reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the same reserved area when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is extracted from the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach is 0 to 190 for normal reach, 191 to 197 for super reach, and 198 for special reach.

  The off-set (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a short time or during the probability change, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the time is short or probable, it will take time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a wait state, and making the player uncomfortable There is sex. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Here, the relationship between the reliability of the variation pattern jackpot and the variation time will be described. The probability that the reach variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot in FIG. 9C is 51/198 for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and various types of super reach (60 seconds). ) Is 129/198, and special reach (90 seconds) is 19/198. On the other hand, the probability that the reach variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 shown in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 in FIG. 9E is 191/198 for various types of normal reach (30 seconds). The reach (60 seconds) is 7/198, and the special reach (90 seconds) is 1/198. The ratio between the big hit and the off-use is 51/191 (= 0.267) for various types of normal reach (30 seconds), 129/7 (= 18.43) for various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 Second) is 19/1 (= 19). This represents the variation pattern and the jackpot reliability. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the greater the variation effect is, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. As a result, the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him / her, and therefore, even if the variation rendering period is long, the player can be interested in the variation rendering with high reliability of the jackpot.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability variation period is a period from when a game ball is detected by the probability variation start switch 703 until a certain time elapses until the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Since the period is set, it is more advantageous for the player to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time because the chances of lottery with a high probability are increased. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is set short for a fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot expectation level, and the fluctuation time is set long for a fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot expectation degree. By selecting a variation pattern, even if a large probability variation period is consumed, it is possible to suppress a problem that significantly reduces the willingness to play a game by playing a game with a degree of expectation for a jackpot.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for outliers shown in FIG. 9 (d) and FIG. 9 (e), when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern table in the probability variation period is constant regardless of the remaining probability variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the remaining period is a predetermined period or more, a relatively short variation pattern table. If a fluctuation pattern table is set that is easy to select, and if it is less than a predetermined period, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be selected (for example, there is a high probability that super reach will be selected). You may comprise so that a pattern table may be set easily.

  Furthermore, in determining whether or not the first symbol is successful, a table for selecting a variation pattern from a plurality of variation pattern tables is selected by lottery by setting a small hit in addition to a miss or a big win. You may comprise. In this case, for the selected variation pattern table, by changing the setting ratio of the variation pattern having a long variation time, it is possible to further improve the period (variation time of the variation time) even within the probability variation period. A period in which a variation pattern table in which a short variation pattern is easily selected is selected) and a period in which the player is disadvantaged (a period in which a variation pattern table with a long variation time is easily selected) are set. Can increase the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is a counter used for the lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

  In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. Acquired and stored in one of the first to fourth reserved areas in the reserved general ball storage area 203 i provided in the RAM 203.

  In the second random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, if the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (first symbol). 2), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values that can be won when the gaming state is short or probable is 250, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1-250”, it is determined that the game state is in a short time or a certain change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than the normal time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  Now, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 holding ball storage comprising four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 is shown. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the entrance to the second entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each reserved area provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. C1, first per-type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, first per-type counter counter storage area 203a2, and fluctuation pattern selection counter for storing the values of the variation type counter CS1 It has a storage area 203a3 and a variation type counter storage area 203a4. Although not shown in the drawing, any one of the reserved areas provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is similar to each reserved area of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Storage areas are provided for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, respectively.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, when there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reservation first to fourth areas are vacant areas, each counter in the special figure 1 first reservation area Stores the value. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  When there are two holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the counters are stored only in the special figure 1 holding first and second areas, the counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding third area. Stores the value of. When there are three holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 holding first to third areas, the counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding fourth area. Stores the value of. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the first entrance 64, the special figure 1 hold first area, the special figure 1 hold second It can be stored in the area, the special figure 1 reserved third area, and the special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, the stop Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 hold first area, the special figure 2 hold second It can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area.

  In addition, when the start winning to the 1st entrance 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the 1st to 4th reserved areas in FIG. 1, the value of each counter at that time is detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, if the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas, The value is discarded without being held. In other words, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured such that the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. When there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the start timing of the variation effect, the first per random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first per random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a has a special figure 1 reservation first area. The stored values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Then, the value of each counter stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on this, the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

  In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a. Value is transferred to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the start winning at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a lottery effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reservation 1st area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reservation ball 1st area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, After moving to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area is changed to a free special figure 1 holding first area or special figure. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is saved. One area of the storage area 203b is released. Further, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball is stored. One area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data may be shifted only for a reserved area in which (variable counter values) are stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. If only the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 holding first area is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 holding second area is transferred to the special figure 1 holding first area. The shift process may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 is also a general map composed of four reserved areas (ordinary reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A holding ball storage area 203i is provided. Each reserved area has a second per-random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by passing the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. 203i1.

  The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i stores a second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, when there is no reservation in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and all of the general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the second random number counter C2 is stored in the general-purpose first reserved area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first area, the second random number in the general-purpose reserved second area Stores the value of the counter C4. When there are two holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first to second areas, The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored. When there are three holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first to third areas, The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored.

  As a result, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passing timing of the sphere in the order in which the passing of the sphere is detected in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 is normally reserved. It can be stored in the 1 area, the general map hold second area, the general map hold third area, and the general map hold fourth area. When the passing of a sphere is detected in the first or second through gates 67 and 670 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-to-fourth reserved areas in the ordinary map. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with an ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general-purpose hold first area of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  Note that when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 in the first reserved area of the reserved figure in the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j, it is then stored in the second reserved area in the reserved figure. In addition, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant ordinary reservation first area. Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold third area is shifted to the free general-purpose hold second area, and the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold fourth area The value is shifted to the third area where the figure is reserved.

  As a result, when the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 reserved in the universal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is retained. One area of the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i is released.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between each reserved area (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserved area. However, each data in the reserved area (secondary area to fourth area) is shifted to an area with a smaller area number. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters) ) May be shifted only for the reserved area in which is stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area. If the data is stored, the data of the general map hold first area is shifted to the general map hold ball execution area 203j, and then the data of the general map hold second area is shifted to the general map hold first area. The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed in the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the customary reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like. In the main control device 110, in the big win lottery or the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are first entrances detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 15) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. 64 or the number of reserved balls of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize) It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each (standby count). The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  The general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the above. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the change display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is executed.

  The usual figure holding ball number counter 203f is configured to hold the change display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) up to four times. Further, the second symbol hold lamps 84 (see FIG. 2) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f are turned on. Thereby, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the second symbol is notified to the player.

  The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether it is executed in accordance with the start winning to 640. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol type When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640.

  The special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the initial stage of setting the start of the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired with winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see FIG. 21).

  In addition, when the execution timing of the change effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, whereas the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If the value of various counters that are greater than 0 and acquired with the start winning at the first entrance 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of various counters stored in the special figure 1 holding first area are shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see FIG. 21).

  In the MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is performed by the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of execution of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), as a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) used for determining the jackpot type. Based on the figure type flag 203k, either “first entrance” or “second entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big win is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for “first entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for “second entrance” is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with the winning at the first entrance 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with winning the second entrance 640 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variable jackpot. In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case.

  As described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The probable change flag 203l is a flag indicating whether the gaming state is a high probability state (probability changing) or a low probability state (normal or short). When the probability changing flag 203l is on, it indicates a high probability state (probably changing), and when the probability changing flag 203l is off, it indicates a low probability state (normal, short time).

  The probability changing flag 203l is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability change flag 203l is turned on when a ball enters the probability change occurrence switch 703 and the probability change is started (transition to the “high probability state”) by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17). The probability change flag 203l is turned off when a ball enters the probability change end switch 707 and the probability change ends (transition to the “low probability state”) (see FIG. 19).

  This probable change flag 203l is used for the “high probability state” for the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used for determining the jackpot in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201. Used to determine which to use for the "low probability state". In the jackpot lottery process, when the probability variation flag 203l is on, the “high probability state” is used, so the jackpot probability is 1/30. When the probability changing flag 203l is off, the “low probability state” is used, so the jackpot probability is 1/300.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery process determines that the jackpot change flag 203l is on, the number of winnings per round of the jackpot game is determined according to the value of the jackpot measurement counter 203p described later (see FIG. 23). ).

  The probability variation start schedule flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is scheduled to start probability variation. When the MPU 201 determines that a ball has entered the through switch 701 (see FIG. 4) of the probability variable object 700, the opening of the electric tulip 702 is set if the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is on.

  The probability change start schedule flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). Further, when the probability variation big hit (the aforementioned 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is turned on. When the ball is not hit, when the ball enters the through switch 701, the electric tulip 702 is opened by the fact that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on (see FIG. 16). A ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, the ball is detected by the probability change generation switch 703, and when the probability change is started, the probability change start scheduled flag 203m is turned off (see FIG. 17).

  In this way, the probability variation start flag 203m is set to OFF when detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703, so that a plurality of game balls enter the electric lip 702, and the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is set by the plurality of game balls. Even if it passes, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the process for setting the probability change is executed each time.

  When the gaming state is the “low probability state”, the gaming state remains in the “low probability state” even if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on. That is, even when the game ball passes through the through switch 701 and the game ball does not enter while the electric tulip 702 is open, the game ball passes through the through switch 701 again, Tulip opening is executed. As a result, despite the fact that the probable big win was won, the electric tulip 702 was not allowed to enter the ball at the first opening, so that it was possible to suppress the problem that the probable game was not given to the player. You can suppress getting tired of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, the ON state is maintained until probability variation is started. However, after the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on, a predetermined time (for example, If the probability change is not started even after 10 minutes), the MPU 201 may turn off the probability change start scheduled flag 203m. In such a configuration, the player can identify whether the game is in the probability variation game by passing the through switch 701 by notifying the player whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot. And the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

  The probability variation object entering counter 203n is a counter that stores the number of balls that are entering the inside of the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). The probable change object entry counter 203n is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0-255.

  The probabilistic accessory entry counter 203n is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere, the MPU 201 adds 1 to the probability change object entry counter 203n (see FIG. 17). When the probability change end switch 707 detects that a sphere has entered, the MPU 201 decrements the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n by 1 (see FIG. 18). Even if the probability variable actor entry counter 203n is decremented by 1, even if the probability variable actor entry counter 203n is 1 or more (even if one sphere is ejected from the probability modifier 700, the sphere is still inside the probability modifier 700). If there is, the probability change is set continuously. On the other hand, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entrance of the ball, and the probability variation is terminated when the MPU 201 subtracts 1 from the probability variation player entry counter 203n to 0 (see FIG. 19).

  In the present embodiment, the probability change continues until the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n becomes zero. In other words, the “probable longest change period” can be determined according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variable object 700. In the present embodiment, the “maximum probability variation period” is configured to be approximately 361 seconds per sphere that has entered the probability variation object 700. In addition, since a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702 and is detected by the probability change generation switch 703 near the entrance, the electric tulip 702 is closed. It is comprised so that it can prevent.

  As a result, the “probable longest change period” becomes longer depending on the number of game balls that have entered the electric tulip 702. Therefore, when the electric tulip 702 is released, the player can enter more game balls. Let's fire a game ball. Therefore, the game can be performed by consuming more game balls. In addition, it is possible to make an interest about how many game balls enter the electric tulip 702, and it is possible to entertain a player other than the jackpot.

  The probability variation period memory 203o is a memory for setting a value corresponding to a period during which the probability variation rotator 704 rotates until the probability variation rotator 704 changes from the "angle A1" state to the "angle A2" state. The probability variation period memory 203o is used by the MPU 201 to compare the value with a probability variation period measurement counter 203p, which will be described later, and to determine whether or not the “probable variation longest period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22). .

  The probability variation period memory 203o is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). In addition, when a sphere enters the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation is started (transition to the “high probability state”) by the MPU 201, the probability variation period memory 203o indicates that the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A1” state. A value corresponding to the period during which the probability variation rotator 704 rotates until the state of “angle A2” is set (see FIG. 17). With respect to this set value, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process, so that the probability variation period memory 203o has 180,000 corresponding to 360 seconds in this embodiment. (= 360 seconds / (execution interval (2 milliseconds) of timer interruption processing (see FIG. 15))) is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, during the probability change, the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability change rotator 704 is rotated at a constant speed around the probability change rotator motor 704a of the probability change rotator 704. This is performed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability change period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) of S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). This is because the “angle AX” is rotated clockwise.

  Here, “angle AX” can be calculated by ““ angle A1-A2 of probability variation rotator 704 ”/ (value of probability variation period memory 203o)”. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” is 0.00166 (= 300/18000) degrees. In other words, the probability variation period memory 203o is used to calculate the “angle AX” that causes the probability variation rotator 704 to rotate clockwise every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. As a result, when a sphere enters the probability change occurrence switch 703 and the probability change is started by the MPU 201 (transition to the “high probability state”), the value set in the probability change period memory 203 o is changed to change the “probability change longest period”. Can be set. The time obtained by adding 1 second to the number of seconds corresponding to the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is the “probability variation longest period”.

  The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is a counter that stores an elapsed period after the probability variation is started. The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is a counter capable of counting in the range of 0 to 65535. The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is used to compare the value with the probability variation period memory 203o and determine whether or not “the maximum probability variation period” exceeds the scheduled period (see FIG. 22).

  The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 when a ball enters the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation is started by the MPU 201 (transition to the “high probability state”) (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added under a predetermined condition every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Further, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entrance of the ball and the probability variation object entry counter 203n is decremented by 1, the probability variation object entry ball counter 203n is 1 or more (the probability variation object 700 has a ball Even if one is discharged, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is cleared to 0 (see FIG. 18) in order to continue the probability variation when there is still a sphere inside the probability variation object 700. Whether or not the “probable longest period” exceeds the scheduled period can be determined by the probability variation period measurement counter 203p.

  The probability variation end schedule flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation end is scheduled. When the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is on, it indicates that the probability variation is scheduled to end, and when the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is off, it indicates that the probability variation end is not scheduled.

  The probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). In addition, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a ball and the MPU 201 decrements the probability variation object entry counter 203n by 1 to 0, the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned on (see FIG. 18). . When the probability change ends, the probability change end scheduled flag 203q is turned off (see FIG. 19).

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entrance of a ball and the MPU 201 subtracts 1 from the probability variable actor entry counter 203n to 0, if the variation effect is varying, the probability variation immediately changes. Instead of ending, the probability change is ended when the variation effect is stopped. That is, the probability variation end schedule flag 203q allows the probability variation to be terminated when the variation effect is stopped, instead of immediately terminating the probability variation if the variation effect is being varied.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 7A, a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and opening / closing plates of specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with respect to the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201. Send commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Further, a through switch 701, a probability variation generating switch 703, a probability variation rotating body motor 704a, and a probability variation end switch 707 of the probability variation member 700 (see FIG. 4) are connected to the input / output port 205.

  The MPU 201 determines whether or not each of the through switch 701, the probability change generation switch 703, and the probability change end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere via the input / output port 205. These switches output an on signal to the MPU 201 when the entry of a sphere is detected, and output an off signal to the MPU 201 when no entry of a sphere is detected. The MPU 201 detects the entrance of a sphere in a switch reading process (see FIG. 16) described later.

  The MPU 201 can control the target angle (absolute angle, relative angle), rotation direction, and rotation speed of the probability variation rotor motor 704a via the input / output port 205. In addition, the MPU 201 can acquire the current angle and rotation direction of the probability-variant rotating body motor 704a.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  With reference to FIG. 10, the operation of the probability variable 700 controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the operation of the probability variable object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram immediately after the start of the probability change (at the start of the probability change). FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram during the probability change (during the probability change period), and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram just before the end of the probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, immediately after the end of the big hit game, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 causes the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 to be placed below the route 703a of the probability variation occurrence switch 703 (lower portion of the route 703b). Stopped to be located. Here, the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is in the state of “angle A1 (see FIG. 11A)”. The gaming state after the big hit game of the pachinko machine 10 is first set to the “low probability state”. Here, if the executed jackpot is a probability change jackpot, the probability change start schedule flag 203m is set to ON (see S907 in FIG. 23). Then, after the big hit game, the player fires the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right region of the variable display device unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed”), so that the ball enters the through switch 701. Then, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is on, the electric tulip 702 is opened by the MPU 201.

  Next, when a sphere enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the sphere, the MPU 201 closes the electric tulip 702 and starts a probability change by a probability change start process (see FIG. 17). At this time, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is transitioned to a “high probability state”. The sphere detected by the probability change generation switch 703 flows down the path 703a below the probability change generation switch 703 and then flows down the path outlet 703b. At this time, since the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is in the state of “angle A1” and the ball reception portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is located below the path outlet 703b, the ball variation portion 704b is surely changed. The sphere detected by the generation switch 703 stops (that is, the sphere stops at the position B in FIG. 10A). For a predetermined time (1 second) after the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere, the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is maintained in a state of being stopped at the “angle A1” state (see S803 in FIG. 22). ).

  Next, when a predetermined time (1 second) elapses after the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entrance of the sphere, a rotation angle is specified to the probability change rotator motor 704a of the probability change rotator 704, and the sphere of the probability change rotator 704 is specified. The receiving portion starts to rotate clockwise around the probability variation rotating body motor 704a. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in the probability variation period progress processing (see S702 in FIG. 22), the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing. (The same angle each time) “angle AX” is rotated (see S805 in FIG. 22). In other words, the sphere stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 rotates and moves clockwise to the ball discharge portion 706 at a constant speed by the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704.

  FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram when a predetermined time (for example, 130 seconds) elapses after the ball receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise during probability variation. The sphere stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is moving by the rotation of the ball reception portion 704b at a constant speed by the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. (See B in FIG. 10B). This is because the MPU 201 rotates the ball receiving portion of the probability-variant rotating body 704 clockwise (at the same angle) “angle AX” every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the “angle AX” is 315 degrees in 360,000 ms because the probability variation rotator 704 rotates about 315 degrees in 360 seconds and rotates to a position overlapping with the ball discharger 706. Therefore, in 2 ms, it is about 0.00175 degrees from 315/18000.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram just before the end of probability change. 10B, a predetermined time has passed and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap (the angle receiving portion of the probability variation rotator 704 is “angle A2”). State). When the ball receiver 704 b and the ball discharger 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiver 704 b is discharged from the ball discharger 706. Since the bottom surface of the ball receiver 704b is inclined in the direction of the ball discharger 706, when the ball receiver 704b and the ball discharger 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiver 704b is discharged from the ball discharger 706. Is done. The sphere flows down the path 707 a below the sphere discharge unit 706 and is detected by the probability change end switch 707. In addition, the sphere B in FIG. 10C is the moment when it is discharged from the ball discharger 706 from the ball receiver 704b. In response to the detection by the probability change end switch 707, the probability change is ended in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19).

  In the normal state where the game state is “low probability state” in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball enters the first entry port 64 more easily than the second entry port 640. As a route through which the game ball can easily enter the entrance 64, the game is played by “left-handed” in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

  Then, when a big hit is made, the game ball can be changed into the variable prize device 65 arranged at the lower center of the game area and the variable prize device 650 arranged on the right side of the game area so that the game ball can be entered. A big hit game is digested by “right-handed” to fire the game ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the variable display unit 80 which is a route that allows the game ball to enter both the variable winning device 650. To do.

  After the jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to a “low probability state” time. When the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (15R probable jackpot or 4R probable jackpot), it is possible to enter a game ball into the electric tulip 702. This is because the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is turned on when the probability variation is a big hit (see FIG. 23). In this state, when a game ball is inserted into the electric tulip 702, the game state shifts to a “high probability state” (probability change) based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change occurrence switch 703.

  The sphere that has passed through the probability change generation switch 703 is stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability change rotator 704 and guided to the sphere discharge portion 706 guided to the probability change end switch 707 at a constant speed. The probability change period is the longest period from the start of probability change until the probability change ends without making a big hit in the probability change (in this embodiment, only one game ball enters the electric tulip 702). 361 seconds for a ball). During this time, the probability variation period (time) does not change regardless of the number of times the variation effect is executed. When a ball enters the probability change end switch 707, the gaming state shifts to a “low probability state” time. During the time reduction, the second entrance 640 is easier to enter than the first entrance 64, so the player plays “right-handed” until the time is over.

  As described above, during the probability variation period according to the present embodiment, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the sphere of the probability variation rotator 704. The ball stopped at the receiving portion 704b is rotated at a constant speed by the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 by the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22) described later, and the probability variation end switch 707 passes the game ball. This is a period until the probability variation is terminated in the probability variation end processing (see FIG. 19). In other words, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation was started).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation production period is set to be longer as the variation production period (for example, normal reach, super reach, special reach) having a higher reliability of the jackpot is set (for example, The extra variable production period is 7 seconds, while the special reach fluctuation production period is 90 seconds). Since the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him / her, even if the variation rendering period is long, the player wants to see the variation rendering with high reliability of the jackpot.

  Here, for example, when a variation pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is executed among the variation patterns described using FIG. There is a demerit for the player that many of the limited probability change periods elapse without the new lottery being executed due to the change production period. However, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern with a long variation production period is set to have a high jackpot reliability (the probability of being selected when the lottery result is a big win than when it is out of place). Can have a high expectation for jackpots and can play games without worrying about the long variable production period. Therefore, the excitement caused by the player playing the game can be increased, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early.

  In addition, even if the lottery result of the variation pattern with a long variation production period is out of date, the probability variation period is unnecessarily long as in the configuration in which the probability variation period is determined by the number of times the variation production is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  In addition, a variation pattern with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is not executed, and a variation pattern with a short variation presentation period with a low jackpot reliability is short (for example, short deviation (7 seconds), long deviation (10 seconds)). Is executed, the remaining period until the probability change ends is less reduced than when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation effect period is executed. Therefore, more jackpot lottery opportunities are left, so it is possible to give more opportunities for players to be drawn in a high probability state.

  Further, the player can predict the end of the probability change from the movement of the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704. Therefore, the player recognizes the remaining probability variation period in an analog manner, predicts the time until the probability variation period ends, and selects a variation pattern with a short variation time so that more lottery opportunities can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in the hope that a jackpot will be obtained. Therefore, the player can improve the interest in the game.

  With reference to FIG. 11 (a)-(d), operation | movement of the probability variable object 700 is demonstrated. 11A to 11D show the relationship between the angle of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 of the probability variation object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the probability variation start. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

  FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram when a big hit is not made during probability change, FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram when a big hit is made during probability change, and FIG. 11C is a probability variable. FIG. 11 (d) is a schematic diagram when the probability changing body of the probability altering substance is stopped during the probability change.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11A, the relationship between the angle of the probability changing rotator 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability change when there is no big hit during the probability change will be described. The time ta0 is a time when a sphere enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the sphere. At ta0, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation is started by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17).

  The time ta1 is the time when 1 second has elapsed from the time ta0, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 starts to rotate clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a (FIG. 10A). reference)).

  The time ta2 is the time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time ta1. The ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is given by the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704 for a predetermined time (this embodiment). Then, it is rotating at a constant speed by a predetermined angle every second). At this time, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A3” state (see FIG. 10B).

  The time ta3 is the time when 240 seconds have elapsed from the time ta2, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. In the present embodiment, the time (from time ta1 to time ta3) until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 are overlapped after the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating is 360. It is assumed to be seconds. During this time, the sphere that is stationary on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability varying rotator 704 rotates with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed around the probability varying rotator motor 704a of the probability varying rotator 704. This is performed every 2 milliseconds which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability change period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) of S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). This is because it is rotated clockwise by “angle AX”.

  The time ta4 is substantially the same as the time ta3, and the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharge portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is. At ta4, the probability change is terminated by a probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After the time ta4, the probability changing rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of the “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by the time ta5 after 0.5 second from the time ta4, The ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A1” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees, the probability variation rotator of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 to the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver thereof) of the probability variation rotator 704 at ta4. The MPU 201 controls the probability variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the motor 704 a at “speed of 600 degrees per second counterclockwise”.

  A lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 have entered during the probability change period (period from ta0 to ta4). This lottery is performed by the jackpot random number table 202a in the “high probability state”. The “probable longest period”, which is the period from time ta0 to time ta4, is about 361 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the relationship between the angle of the probability changing rotator 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability change in the case of a big hit during the probability change will be described. The time tb0 is the same as the time ta0 in FIG. The time tb1 is the same as the time ta1 in FIG. The time from tb1 to tb2 is the same as the time from ta1 to ta2 in FIG.

  At time tb2, the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability changing rotator 704 is being rotated together with the ball receiving portion 704b at a constant speed by the probability changing rotator motor 704a of the probability changing rotator 704. At this time, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A3” state (see FIG. 10B). FIG. 11B shows a state in which the fluctuating effect that is a big hit at tb2 is stopped. When the variation effect that is a big hit stops, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is then rotated clockwise so as to be in the "angle A2" state (S720 in FIG. 21), and 0.5 from tb2 time. By tb3 when two seconds have elapsed, the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is in the state of “angle A2.” At time tb2, “angle A3”, which is the current angle of the probability variation rotator motor 704a, is obtained from the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variation rotator 704. For example, if the clockwise rotation angle from the state of “angle A3” to the state of “angle A2” is 200 degrees when the probability variation rotator 704 is 200 degrees, the probability variation rotator motor of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 at tb2. The MPU 201 controls the variable probability rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command to rotate the variable probability rotator motor 704a of the variable probability rotator 704 "clockwise at a speed of 400 degrees per second" to the 704a (motor driver). To do.

  The time tb4 is substantially the same as the time tb3, and the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharge portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is. At this time, the probability change is ended by a probability change end process (see FIG. 19). After the time tb4, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of the “angle A1”, and the probability variation rotator 704 is changed to the “angle” by tb5 after 0.5 seconds from tb4. The state becomes “A1”. Note that the control of the variably rotating body 704 by the MPU 201 from tb4 to tb5 is the same as from ta4 to ta5 in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11C, the relationship between the angle of the probability variation rotator 704 and the elapsed time from the start of probability variation when two balls enter the probability variation object 700 will be described. The time tc0 is a time when a ball enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the first game ball. Although the electric tulip 702 is closed at tc0, another sphere (second sphere) enters the electric tulip 702 before the closing. At tc0, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state. At this time, the probability change is started by the probability change start process (see FIG. 17). Further, 1 is added to the probability variable actor entry counter 203n that stores the number of balls entering the probability variable accessory 700 (between the probability change occurrence switch 703 and the probability change end switch 707) (FIG. 17). (See S301).

  The time tc1 is the time when 1 second has elapsed from the time tc0, and the time when the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)). Since another sphere (second sphere) has entered the electric tulip 702, the probability change generation switch 703 detects the second sphere entering from tc0 to tc1, and the probability change is confirmed. 1 is added to the winning ball entry counter 203n (see S301 in FIG. 17). At the time tc1, the value of the probable change object entry counter 203n is 2.

  The time tc2 is the time when 360 seconds have elapsed from the time tc1, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. In the period from tc1 to tc2, the first sphere is stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and rotates at a constant speed around the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. Yes. On the other hand, the second sphere is stopped by a portion other than the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability changing rotator 704 (a boundary portion between the ball receiving portion 704b and the path 703a) in the path 703a below the probability change generation switch 703.

  At the time tc3, it is almost the same as the time tc2, and the first ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharge portion 706 and is switched by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be detected. After the time tc3, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the “angle A1” state (see S504 in FIG. 18), and by tc4 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from tc3, The probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state. At the time tc3, the value of the probability variable actor entry counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entrance to the probability change end switch 707 (see S501 in FIG. 18). It is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, even when the probability change end switch 707 detects a game ball, if the value of the probability variable accessory entry ball counter 203n is not 0, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. And a high probability state (probability change) is maintained. Therefore, when two or more game balls have entered the electric tulip 702, the high probability state can be maintained until all the game balls that have entered are detected by the probability change end switch 707.

  At tc4 time, the second sphere that has been stopped by the path 703a below the probability change generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability change rotator 704.

  The time tc5 is the time when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the time tc4, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is started to rotate clockwise by the probability variation rotator motor 704a (FIG. 10A). )reference)). The probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 based on the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707 at tc3 (see S505 in FIG. 18). Then, from tc3 to tc4, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by 1 (see FIG. 22) at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At tc5 when 1 second has elapsed from tc3, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 (corresponding to 1 second) (see FIG. 22). Thereby, at tc5, the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a (see FIG. 22).

  The time tc6 is the time when 360 seconds have elapsed from the time tc5, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. In the period from tc5 to tc6, the second sphere is stopped on the ball receiver 704b of the probability variable rotator 704, and is moved together with the ball receiver 704b at a constant speed by the probability variable rotator motor 704a of the probability variable rotator 704. It is rotating.

  At time tc7, substantially the same time as time tc6, the second ball stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotor 704 flows down the path below the ball discharge portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is time to be done. At tc7, the probability change is terminated by a probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). After time tc7, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the "angle A1" state, and by time tc8, the probability variation rotator 704 is in the "angle A1" state. The “probable longest change period”, which is a period from tc0 to tc7, is approximately 722 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the “probable longest change period” is configured to be doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. That is, even if the probability variable player entry counter 203n is decremented by 1 based on the entrance to the probability change occurrence switch 703, the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n is 1 or more (one ball is ejected from the probability variant 700). Even if the ball is still inside the probability variable object 700, the probability variation is configured to continue (see S504 to S506 in FIG. 18). Thus, even when a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability variation period can be extended in proportion to the number of game balls that have entered. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming to enter a large number of game balls with the electric tulip 702, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the processing according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is not limited to this, and when there are two or more balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703, for example, probability variation is started. Then, the probability variable rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variable rotator motor 704a (see FIG. 22) so that there is only one sphere inside the probability variable member 700 in one second. One or more balls may be discharged from the ball discharge unit 706. Specifically, the probability variation rotator 704 reciprocates between the state of “angle A1” and the state of “angle A2” until the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n becomes 1 during the one second. The rotating body motor 704a is configured to be controlled. In addition, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which the number of balls entering the probability change generation switch 703 is always one. Specifically, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the sphere on the path 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the sphere on the path 703a is blocked are provided immediately above the probability change generation switch 703. In a state where the passage of the ball on the path 703a is blocked, a path for guiding the ball that has been blocked to the ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. When a ball entering the probability change occurrence switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 is configured to change from a state in which the passage of the sphere on the route 703a is permitted to a state in which the passage of the sphere on the route 703a is blocked for 10 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the electric tulip 702, the probability change is continued until all the game balls are detected by the probability change end switch 707. Based on the fact that the first game ball is detected by the probability change end switch 707, the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state, and the ball receiving unit 702 is rotated at high speed to discharge the remaining game balls. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, the probability variation period can be made constant at all times, and euphoria can be made constant. In addition, the probability variation period may be continued up to a predetermined number of game balls, not limited to one.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (d), the case where the rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 of the probability variable member 700 is stopped during the probability variation (when stopped) will be described. For example, during the probability variation, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a breaks down, or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, so that the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 rotates. Assume a case where it is stopped. As long as the rotation of the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704 continues to be stopped, the sphere stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704 does not reach the ball discharge portion 706. That is, there is a problem that a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707, and the probability variation period is continued longer than usual.

  Further, for example, in order to prevent illegally discharging a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b to the path 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped, Even if an illegal act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharge unit 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball stopped on the ball receiving unit 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is discharged. The part 706 is not reached. As a result, the probability change can be extended illegally. However, since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a means for preventing this fraud, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the probability variation from being illegally extended. Means capable of preventing the probability variation from being illegally extended will be described with reference to FIG.

  At td0, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation is started by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17). At td0, a value corresponding to a period during which the probability variation rotator 704 rotates from the state of the “angle A1” to the state of the “angle A2” is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. In this embodiment, 180000 (= 360 seconds / (timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds)) corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Further, at td0, the probability variation period measurement is performed. The counter 203p is set to 0. During the probability variation, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is incremented by one in the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22) every execution interval (2 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process.

  The time td1 is the time when 1 second has elapsed from the time td0, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 starts to rotate clockwise by the probability variation rotator motor 704a (see FIG. 10A). ). At td1, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 (corresponding to 1 second).

  td2 is the time when 120 seconds have passed since td1, and the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. In the middle of doing At this time, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A3” state (see FIG. 10B). At the time td2, the probability variation rotator motor 704a breaks down, or the line connecting the probability variation rotator motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut, whereby the probability variation rotator 704 stops rotating. After td2, the probability variation 704 continues to stop at “angle A3”. However, the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22) is configured to end the probability variation when the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or larger than a predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o.

  td3 is the time when 241 seconds have elapsed since td2, and td3 is the time when 362 seconds have elapsed since td0. At td3, the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 181000 (corresponding to 362 seconds). The value of the probability variation period memory 203o is 180000 (corresponding to 360 seconds), and the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or larger than a predetermined amount (1000) of the value of the probability variation period memory 203o, so the probability variation ends at td3 (FIG. 22 S807).

  For example, when the probability variation rotating body motor 704a fails or the line connecting the probability variation rotating body motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally cut during probability variation, the rotation of the probability variation rotation body 704 is stopped. Is assumed. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 continues to be stopped, the sphere stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704 does not reach the ball discharge portion 706. In other words, a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. As a result, the probability change can be extended illegally. However, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a means for preventing this illegal act (the above-mentioned probability change is terminated at td3 (see FIG. 22)), so that it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended. . In addition, for example, during the probability change, it is illegal that the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b is discharged to the path 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability changing rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap. For the purpose of prevention, even if a fraudulent act that causes the magnet to be applied to the front side of the ball discharge unit 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, means for preventing the fraudulent action (the probability change at the time td3 described above) Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the probability variation from being illegally extended.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change is set to end by detecting the game ball by the probability change end switch 707, and the probability change end switch 707 does not detect the game ball even after a predetermined time has elapsed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the present embodiment is not limited to this, and it is set in advance so as to end the probability change in a predetermined time, and only the means for notifying the player of the time is used in the present embodiment. As described above, an effect using a game ball may be performed. Such a configuration can prevent fraud.

<About the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 that controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113, and a display command for notifying the display content to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in an effect corresponding to the display data table is stored. The MPU 231 specifies the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, reads the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmation command from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. . For example, when the stop symbol is an out symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 4R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the contents of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the change effect of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. I can recognize that.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect includes the one that displays the out symbol as a stop symbol, the one that displays the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), and the normal jackpot (15R normal) Each of them is provided with a decisive display.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “sea stage”, “palace stage”, and “deep sea stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back surface type and the back surface type corresponding to which state You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the sub symbol between “0” and “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”. “2” is assigned to the symbol as an identification number, and “3” is assigned to the sub-graphic between “1” and “2” as an identification number. In this way, the sub-design is also given a different identification number depending on the position (which main symbol is between) where the sub-design is inserted.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation effect until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is performed. Offset information with the identification number of the stop symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a described later provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, 1 is added to the pointer 233b. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 14) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 performs control to output sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display content notified by this display command.

  When a plurality of display contents are defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the display contents previously defined, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device. It transmits to 113.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, a time counter 233d, an effect permission flag 233e, and a changing flag 233f.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233b one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 14), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  When the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 performs control to output sound from the sound output device 226 according to the display content notified by this display command.

  The pointer 233b is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233b to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (S2702 in FIG. 30). The value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233b is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 14). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 14, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. The That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The time counter 233d is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 ( Each time (see S2702 in FIG. 30) is executed, the time counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The effect permission flag 233e is a flag indicating whether or not the effect is permitted by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. An effect is permitted when the effect permission flag 233e is on, and an effect is not permitted when the effect permission flag 233e is off.

  The effect permission flag 233e is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). After the effect permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, when the effect control command is received by the display control device 114, the effect permission flag 233e is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 231, it is used to determine whether or not to display an effect. The effect is displayed from when the effect permission flag 233e is turned on.

  The changing flag 233f is a flag indicating whether or not the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing. When the changing flag 233f is on, the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changing, and when the changing flag 233f is off, the changing effect of the third symbol display device 81 is not changing. .

  The changing flag 233f is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 233 (see S2601 in FIG. 29A). In the sound lamp control device 113, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display variation pattern command is received by the display control device 114, the variation flag 233f is turned on (see S2803 in FIG. 31). Further, after the confirmation command is transmitted by the main control device 110, when the confirmation command is received by the display control device 114, the changing flag 233f is turned off (see S2805 in FIG. 31). The changing flag 233f is used to determine whether or not the changing effect is being performed. When the changing flag 233f is on, a changing effect corresponding to the display changing pattern command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the drawing process of the display control device 114 (S2704 in FIG. 30). When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30).

  The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

<Regarding Control Processing in Main Controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 26. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. is generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, a probability change end command, a probability variation abnormality command, a production permission set in a variation process (see FIG. 21) or a variation start process (see FIG. 23) which is one of the variation processes. A command or the like is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then in the case of a big hit state, the specific winning ports (large opening ports) 65a, 650a of the variable winning devices 65,650 are read. A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning openings 65a, 650a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning openings 65a, 650a. To do. And when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 650a are both opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and either the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened. You may comprise so that either one may be open | released. It should be noted that the specific winning opening to be opened may be determined by the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol, a predetermined lottery, or the like, or the specific winning opening to be opened for each round may be switched.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is held in the ordinary holding ball storage area 203i as the ball passes through the second entrance (through gate) 267, The value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i is shifted to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j. At this time, each hold, such as the 2nd area of the general map hold → the 1st area of the general map hold, the 3rd area of the general map hold → the 2nd area of the general map hold, the 4th area of the general map hold → the 3rd area of the general map hold The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

  Then, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j matches the random number value to be won, the lottery is performed (win lottery). After the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed, and the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed. The electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the winning random number value, After the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a remains in the closed state.

  It should be noted that different random numbers are set depending on whether the gaming state is normal, during a short time, or during probability change. In other words, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the game state is normal and is a win. On the other hand, there are 250 random number values that can be won when the game state is shorter or more likely, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is winning when the gaming state is short-running or probable.

  In addition, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal. Furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is released for a longer time when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80 so as to pass the ball (so-called “right-handed”), and aiming at 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640 However, it is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, switch reading processing is executed (S106). The switch reading process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop-type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, when reaching 899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively), each is cleared to 0. Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second per-random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109). Next, a start winning process associated with winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and mainly enters the through switch 701, the probability change occurrence switch 703, and the probability change end switch 707 that constitute the probability change object 700. This is a process for detecting and executing a process corresponding to the detection, or for executing a process for reading input states of various switches connected to the main controller 110.

  When the switch reading process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S200). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S200: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. Since the pachinko machine 10 does not change the gaming state to the probability change during the big hit, the ball enters the switches (the through switch 701, the probability change occurrence switch 703, the probability change end switch 707) of the probability changing agent 700 that can change the gaming state. There is no need to determine during the jackpot. Even if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is set to ON by the process of S200, the process of releasing the electric tulip 702 is not executed, and the game ball does not enter the electric tulip 702 until the big hit game is finished. Can be set as follows.

  If it is not a big hit (S200: No), it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201). When it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is on in order to determine whether the electric tulip 702 should be opened. (S202). If it is determined that the probability change start schedule flag 203m is on (S202: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (the electric accessory 702a is opened) (S203), and the process proceeds to S204.

  As a result, a game ball can enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is off (S202: No), the process proceeds to S204. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in a state to be opened, it is possible to maintain a state in which the ball does not enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. . When the probability variation big hit (the above-mentioned 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) of the MPU 201, the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by causing the through switch 701 to enter the ball after the jackpot game is over after the probability change jackpot is determined (the game state is “low probability state”). A sphere can be made to enter the probability change generation switch 703 inside the tulip 702. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S201: No), the process proceeds to S204.

  Next, in the process of S204, it is determined whether or not the probability variation occurrence switch 703 has detected a game ball (S204). When it is determined that the probability change generation switch 703 has detected a game ball (S204: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S205), and the probability change start process (S206) is executed, and S207 is executed. Move on to processing. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703 near the entrance, so that a large amount of spheres are placed inside the probability variation object 700 ( For example, up to 4) The probability variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S204: No), the process proceeds to S207.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the electric tulip 702 is opened, the open state is maintained until the probability change occurrence switch 703 detects the game ball, so that the player can reliably play the game ball on the electric tulip 702. Can be entered. In addition, even when there are few remaining balls, even if it is not possible to enter the game ball into the electric tulip 702, the game ball can be entered into the electric tulip 702 after purchase. Can be suppressed.

  Next, in the process of S207, it is determined whether or not the probability variation end switch 707 has detected a game ball (S207). If it is determined that the probability change end switch 707 has detected a game ball (S207: Yes), a probability change end scheduled process (S208) is executed. The probability variation end scheduled process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) is executed, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Is not changing (S209: No), the probability variation end process (S210) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211. The probability variation end process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: Yes), the process proceeds to S211.

  Here, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing in the process of S209 (S209), and it is determined whether or not to execute the probability change end process (S210). Explain why.

  For example, during the probability change, immediately before the change effect is stopped, the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, and the game balls stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 are below the ball discharge portion 706. A case is assumed where the probability variation end switch 707 flows down the path 707a, that is, “a situation in which the probability variation appears to have ended immediately before the change effect is stopped”. In this case, the player may be confused whether the probability of jackpot of the variation effect is a probability of probability variation or normal probability. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that the probability variation end switch 707 has detected a game ball (S207: Yes), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S209: In the case of Yes), in the switch reading process, the probability change end scheduled process (S208) is executed, and the probability change end process (S210) is not executed.

  In the variation process (see FIG. 21), after the variation is stopped (S717), the probability variation end process (S210) is executed. In the probability change end process (see FIG. 19), a probability change end command is set (S403 in FIG. 19). Thereafter, the display control device 114 receives the probability change end command via the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2808 in FIG. 31), and displays “probability change end” on the third symbol display device 81 (see S2809 in FIG. 31). Therefore, the player recognizes the end of the probability change by visually recognizing the display of “end of probability change”.

  That is, even if the probability variation end switch 707 detects a game ball, the probability variation is not terminated during the variation effect variation, but the probability variation is terminated after the variation effect is stopped, and the player is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-mentioned “situation in which the probability change seems to have ended immediately before the change effect is stopped”.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is not fluctuating (S209: No), is the probability of the next variation effect jackpot the probability that the probability variation is still occurring even if the probability variation is terminated at that time? Since it is not confused whether the probability is normal, the probability variation end processing (S210) is executed immediately after the probability variation termination scheduled processing (S208) is performed, and the probability variation is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, the predetermined payout rate of the pachinko machine 10 is changed by extending the probability change period for a period in which the special symbol is changing, such that the lottery opportunity is not given. Defects can be suppressed. In addition, since the end of probability change is set at an easy-to-understand timing, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, in the process of S211, other processes are executed (S211), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. In the process of S211, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  In the present embodiment, when the first symbol (special symbol) is fluctuating, the probability variation is not terminated and the probability variation is terminated after the first symbol is stopped (a configuration in which the probability variation end is delayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability change may be configured to end even when the first symbol is changing. In this case, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is confused by displaying the display mode indicating the end of the probability change with a delay until the first symbol variation stops. Furthermore, with this configuration, the probability variation period can be made constant, and a fair gaming machine can be provided.

  Next, the probability variation start process (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this probability change start process (S206). The probability change start process (S206) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the ball entering the probability change occurrence switch 703, the probability change process is performed. Is a process of starting.

  When the probability change start process (FIG. 17, S206) is executed, first, 1 is added to the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n that counts the number of game balls that have entered the electric tulip 702 (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation start flag 203m is on (S302). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation start schedule flag 203m is not on (that is, is off) (S302: No), the probability variation start processing is terminated.

  If the probability change start schedule flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability change start schedule flag 203m is turned off (S303). Next, a value corresponding to the probability variation period is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S304). In the present embodiment, 180,000 (= 360 seconds ÷ (timer) corresponding to 360 seconds, which is a period of rotation of the probability varying rotator 704 from the state of the “angle A1” to the state of the “angle A2”. Next, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0 (S305), the probability variation flag 203l is turned on (S306), and the probability variation start processing is terminated. .

  Here, the process of S304-S306 is a process which changes the game state of the pachinko machine 10 to a probability change. In the process of S306, the gaming state transitions from a low-probability state (short time) to a high-probability state (probability change). Thereafter, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the “high probability state” for the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used for the jackpot determination is used.

  If the probability change start flag 203m is on (S302: Yes), the probability change start flag 203m is turned off (S303) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change occurrence switch 703. This is because the process of transitioning to probability change is executed only when the ball enters the first time. That is, when the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the first ball entering, the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is on, so that all the processes of S301 to S306 are executed. Next, when the probability change generation switch 703 detects the second ball entering, the probability change start scheduled flag 203m is turned off (S303), so the processing of S301 and S302 is executed, and the processing of S303 to S306 is performed. Is not executed. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703, the probability variation can be normally started.

<Probability end processing>
Next, the probability variation end scheduled process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the probability variation end schedule process (S208). The probability change end scheduled process (S208) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the ball entering the probability change end switch 707, This is a process for scheduling the end of probability change.

  When the probability variation end schedule process (FIG. 18, S208) is executed, first, the probability variation bonus entry counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the probable accessory entry counter 203n is 0 (S502). If it is determined that the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is 0 (S502: Yes), there is no ball entering the inside of the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707). Therefore, in order to end the probability change by the probability change end process (see FIG. 19), the probability change end scheduled flag 203q is turned on (S503), the probability change end scheduled process ends, and the process returns to the switch reading process. As a result, when the probability variation end process (see FIG. 19) is executed next, the probability variation is terminated.

  In S502, if it is determined that the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S502: No), the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to “angle A1” (S504). . Next, 0 is set in the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S505), a value corresponding to the probability variation period (180,000 corresponding to 360 seconds) is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S506), and the probability variation end scheduled process is terminated. Return to the switch reading process.

  Here, the processes of S504 to S506 are not processes for which the probability change is scheduled to end, and the “maximum probability change period” is doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability change occurrence switch 703. It is a process to make. The processing of S504 to S506 is executed when there are a plurality of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. When there are a plurality of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703, the sphere is stopped in the path 703a below the probability variation occurrence switch 703, and therefore when the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to “angle A1” ( In step S <b> 504, the sphere that has stopped on the path 703 a below the probability variation occurrence switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704. One second after the execution of S506, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to start rotating clockwise (see FIG. 11C) by the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22).

  Note that when the processing of S504 is executed, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees, the probability variation of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 to the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver thereof) of the probability variation rotator 704 in the process of S504. The MPU 201 controls the probability variation rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704 a at “speed of 600 degrees per second counterclockwise”. Thereby, 0.5 seconds after the process of S504, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state. Here, the time required to counterclockwise rotate the rotating body 704 to the state of the “angle A1” (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) is also included in the probability changing period, and the probability changing set during that time is also included. Since the value of the period measurement counter 203p is updated, after the probability variation rotator 704 has moved to the position of the “angle A1” and stopped for 0.5 seconds, a process of rotating the “angle AX” is executed. . Thereby, even when the probability variation period is doubled or tripled, it can be set constant. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that variation occurs in the probability variation period.

<Probability end processing>
Next, the probability variation end process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this probability variation end process (S210). The probability change end process (S210) is executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). Is the process of ending. Further, the probability variation end process (S210) is executed even after the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21). When the ball enters the probability change end switch 707 and is changing, if the change is stopped in the change process (see FIG. 21), the change is stopped by the probability change end process (S210), and the third symbol is displayed. “Probability change end” is displayed on the display device 81. Thereby, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-described “situation in which the probability change seems to have ended immediately before the change effect is stopped”.

  When the probability change end process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability change end scheduled flag 203q is on (S401). The probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is turned on in the probability variation end scheduled processing (see FIG. 18). If it is determined in the process of S401 that the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S401: No), the probability variation termination process is terminated. As described above, when the probability variation end schedule flag 203q is not on, the probability variation is not terminated even if the probability variation termination processing is executed. Thereby, in the variation process (see FIG. 21), even if the probability variation end process (S210) is executed after the variation is stopped, the probability variation is not terminated if the probability variation end scheduled flag 203q is off.

  If it is determined that the probability change end scheduled flag 203q is on (S401: Yes), the probability change end scheduled flag 203q is turned off (S402), a probability change end command is set (S403), and the probability change end flag is turned off (S404). ), The probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to “angle A1” (S405), and the probability variation end processing is terminated. In the process of S404, the gaming state transitions from a high probability state (probably changing) to a low probability state time-short state (short time). Thereafter, in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 of FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201, the “low probability state” is used as the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) used for determining the jackpot.

  When the probability variation end process is executed, the probability variation rotating body 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees, the probability variation of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 to the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variation rotator 704 in the process of S405. The MPU 201 controls the probability variation rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704 a at “speed of 600 degrees per second counterclockwise”. Thereby, 0.5 seconds after the process of S405, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state. Thereby, the probability variation period can be set constant.

  By the process of S405, the probability variation rotator 704 is set to the “angle A1” state at the end of the probability variation, so that the next time the ball enters the probability variation object 700, the ball detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703 Since it flows down the path 703a below the generation switch 703 and is received by the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704, thereafter, the probability variation rotator 704 can be rotated every second, and the player can reduce the probability variation period. It is easy to understand.

<Starting winning process>
Next, the start winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). The start winning process (S110) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When there is a winning, a holding process of values indicated by various random number counters and a counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning prize) (S601). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown). It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NA) is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S602). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a win at the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 is provided. If the number of reserved balls NA <4 is not satisfied (S602: No), the process proceeds to S605.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA <4 of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 (S602: Yes). , 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of held balls NA) (S603), and further, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S604).

  In the subsequent process of S605, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S605). Here, a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S605: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S606). Then, there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S605: No), or even if there is a win at the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 If the number of held balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S606: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S605: Yes), and the number of reserved balls NB <4 of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S606: Yes). The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203 (the number of held balls NB) is incremented by 1 (S607), and further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S608). Then, the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

<Variation processing>
Next, the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancement process (see FIG. 22) is also performed in which the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated to advance the probability variation period.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S701). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S701: No), a probability variation period progress process (S702) is executed. Note that the probability variation period progress processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is not changing (S703: No). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S704). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S704: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S704, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop (S704: Yes), it means that the change effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S705). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is larger than 0 (S705: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S706), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S707).

  In this data shift process, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift processing, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S708), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the fluctuation start process (S709) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process ends. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S705, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the number of held balls NB is 0, and the start winning to the second entrance 640 is made. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating production effect that accompanies (S705: No), then the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (the holding ball of the fluctuating production accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not (number NA) is greater than 0 (S710).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the held ball number NA is 0, and the hold associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating effect (S710: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is greater than 0 (S710: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) 1 is subtracted (S711), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S712).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 holding first area of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 1st Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 2nd Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 4th Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S713), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S709, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed (S709), and this process is terminated.

  In this variation process, when the variation effect can be started (S704: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S705). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is held (S705: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding ball number counter 203d, that is, whether or not the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning prize at the second entrance 640 is configured so that the big win lottery is performed in preference to the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big win lottery. Yes.

  In the process of S703, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S714). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If it has not passed (S714: No), the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is updated (S715), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S714: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S716). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S709) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, in step S709, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Depending on the value of C2, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the probability variation jackpot that makes it easy to enter a ball into the probability variation occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds), Either a 4R probability variation jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that makes it easier for a ball to enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703 that triggers a transition to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds or a maximum round number), or a 15R normal jackpot (maximum rounds) After a jackpot of 15 rounds, the state is short for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). Symbol or is determined to be a hit).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue color are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S716, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as the LED of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A confirmation command is set in order to confirm in synchronization with lighting (S717), and a probability change end process (see FIG. 19) is executed (S210). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  The probability change end process (S210) is also executed in the switch reading process (see FIG. 16) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the probability change is performed based on the ball entering the probability change end switch 707. This is a process to end. Further, the probability variation end process (S210) is also executed after the variation effect is stopped in the variation process (see FIG. 21). In the variation process (see FIG. 21), when the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707 is detected, the variation effect (see FIG. 21) stops, and then the probability variation is terminated by the probability variation end processing (S210). “End of probability change” is displayed on the symbol display device 81. Thereby, there is an effect that the player is not confused even in the above-described “situation in which the probability change seems to have ended immediately before the change effect is stopped”.

  After S210, it is determined whether or not the variation effect just stopped is a big hit (S718). If it is not a big hit (S718: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S718: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probable accessory winning ball counter 203n is 1 or more (S719). If it is determined that the probable bonus object entry counter 203n is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S719: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable winning ball entry counter 203n is 1 or more (S719: Yes), the gaming state is being probabilistic, and a ball is received at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variable rotating body 704 of the probability variable 700. Since it is stationary, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise to “angle A2” in order to discharge the ball of the probability variation 700 (S720). When the ball receiver 704 b and the ball discharger 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiver 704 b is discharged from the ball discharger 706. The discharged sphere flows down the path 707a below the sphere discharge unit 706 and is detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). In response to this detection, the probability variation is terminated in the probability variation termination process (see FIG. 19). In addition, when the probability variation winning ball entry counter 203n is 2 or more, before the jackpot game is started, the probability variation rotating body 704 is reciprocated between the state of "angle A1" and the state of "angle A2" After the jackpot game is over, it is assumed that there is no ball in the probability variation object 700.

<Probability change process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22, the probability change period progress process (S702) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the probability variation period progress processing (S702). The probability variation period progress processing (S702) is processing executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 21) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated to perform probability variation. It is a process of advancing the period. The probability change period progress process (S702) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 21), when it is not a big hit (S701: No). Process.

  In the probability variation period progress processing (FIG. 22, S702), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on (S801). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S801: No), this process is terminated. As a result, even if the probability change period progress process is executed except during the probability change, the processes of S802 to S808 are not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203l is on (S801: Yes), 1 is added to the probability change period measurement counter 203p (S802).

  Next, in the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S803). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than 500 (S803: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is equal to or greater than “angle A2” (S804).

  Here, the probability variable rotator 704 includes the state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variable rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap with each other, and further rotates clockwise from the “angle A2”. The state of the case. In the process of S804, by acquiring the current angle of the probability variable rotator motor 704a from the MPU 201 from the probability variable rotator motor 704a (motor driver thereof) of the probability variable rotator 704, it is determined whether the probability variable rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the "angle A2". .

  If it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is not greater than or equal to “angle A2” (ie, less than “angle A2”) (S804: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is moved clockwise from the current angle to the “angle AX ”(S805).

  Here, since the process of S802 is a process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), during the probability change period, the probability change period measurement counter 203p is 1 is added every 2 milliseconds during probability change. In the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more. The value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, the processing (S805) for rotating the probability variation rotator 704 clockwise by “angle AX” from the current angle is not executed for one second.

  In the case where a plurality of balls have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703, when the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entrance of one sphere, the inside of the probability variation agent 700 (from the probability variation occurrence switch 703 to the probability variation end switch 707). If a ball is present in the middle), the probability variation rotator 704 rotates counterclockwise from “angle A2” to “angle A1” for 0.5 seconds from the time of detection of the incoming ball. For 5 seconds, the probability variation 704 is stopped in the state of “angle A1”. As a result, according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703, the “maximum probability variation period” can be set to be twice or three times constant.

  In the process of S804, if it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (S804: Yes), the process is terminated. The probability variation rotator 704 is in the state of “angle A2” when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the ball of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to further rotate the probability varying rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the process of S805, this process is terminated. As a result, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and if there is no other sphere inside the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation occurrence switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the probability variation ends. The probability variation rotator 704 maintains the “angle A2” state. Thereafter, when the end of the probability variation period is set, the rotation is set to “angle A1”. In the present embodiment, the angle “A2” is rotated from the angle “A1” at a high speed in the counterclockwise direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to rotate in the clockwise direction. . With this configuration, the probability variation rotator 704 can be moved to the “angle A1” more quickly.

  In addition, by the process of S805, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated “angle AX” clockwise from the current angle. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 are overlapped (from time ta1 to time ta3 in FIG. 11). ) Is 360 seconds. 180,000 corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. The process of S805 is a process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), during the probability change (S801: No). The angle A1-A2 "/ (value of the probability variation period memory 203o) of the rotating body 704" can be calculated. In the present embodiment, the “angle AX” is 0.00166 (= 300/18000) degrees.

  When the process of S805 is executed, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p then determines whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806). . If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not equal to or greater than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: No), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S806: Yes), the probability variation flag is turned off to forcibly terminate the probability variation (S807). An abnormal command is set (S808), and this process ends. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31) and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2811 in FIG. 31). As a result, when it is determined that the elapsed time of the probability variation period has been exceeded, the probability variation is forcibly terminated, so that the probability variation period is not unduly extended.

  When it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is equal to or greater than “angle A2” (S804: Yes), the processing of S805 to S808 is not executed. Thereby, immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 enters the state of “angle A2,” the ball of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Even if the probability change is not finished immediately but the probability change is ended when the variation effect is stopped, the processing of S806 to S808 is executed during the change of the variation effect, and the probability variation abnormality command is set. Absent.

<Operational effects of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period according to the present embodiment, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the sphere of the probability variation rotator 704. The probability variation end switch 707 rotates the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704 at a constant speed by the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) for the ball stopped on the receiving unit 704b. This is the period from when a sphere is detected to the end of probability change in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19). In other words, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation was started).

  In conventional gaming machines, the variation production period tends to be longer (for example, the fluctuation production effect of losing) as the variation production period (for example, normal reach, super reach, special reach) with high reliability of the jackpot is higher. The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation production period is 90 seconds). Since the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him / her, even if the variation rendering period is long, the player wants to see the variation rendering with high reliability of the jackpot.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that a variation pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period among the variation patterns described with reference to FIG. However, since the probability variation period is a certain period due to the probability variable object 700, the probability variation period does not become longer due to the variation rendering period. In the conventional ST machine, even if a variation pattern with a large jackpot reliability and a long fluctuation production period is made multiple times during probability change, there is no big hit, and the game becomes monotonous simply by increasing the probability change period. This could cause discomfort to the player. According to the pachinko machine 10, even if a variation effect with a large jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is performed, the “probable longest change period” is constant. Pleasure can be reduced.

  Then, a variation pattern with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation presentation period is not executed, and a variation pattern with a short variation presentation period with a low jackpot reliability is short (for example, a short deviation (7 seconds), a long deviation (10 seconds)). Is executed, the remaining period until the probability change ends is less reduced than when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation effect period is executed. As a result, more chances to win a lottery are left.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is executed, and a variation pattern with a short jackpot reliability is not executed with a short variation pattern, the remaining period until the probability change ends is There is more reduction than when a variation pattern with a short variation production period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation production, the chances of the big hit lottery are reduced. Thereby, the player's desire to make a big hit inevitably increases in the variation effect. That is, enthusiasm for the variation effect is particularly increased.

  Therefore, the degree of reduction of the jackpot lottery opportunity varies depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that it is possible to provide a new gameability to the player. Further, the player can predict the end of the probability change from the movement of the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704.

<Operational effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that during the probability change, the probability variable rotator motor 704a breaks down, or the line connecting the probability variable rotator motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally disconnected, so that the rotation of the probability variable rotator 704 stops. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 continues to stop, the sphere stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704 does not reach the ball discharge portion 706. In other words, a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in order to prevent illegally discharging a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b to the path 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped, Even if an illegal act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharge unit 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball stopped on the ball receiving unit 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is discharged. The part 706 is not reached. As a result, the probability change can be extended illegally.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10, if it is determined in S806 from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o that the probability variation period has elapsed, the probability variation flag is turned off (S807). Since the probability change is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Variation start processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the fluctuation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S709). This variation start process (S709) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A lottery of “big hit” or “off” (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changing effect performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S901). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (that is, in normal, short time, and probability change flag 203l is off), it is associated with a “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, when “7, 307, 582” is a jackpot random number value and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (that is, the probability change flag and the probability change flag 203l are on), the “high hit random number table 202a” "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618 associated with" probability state " , 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are the jackpot random numbers. In the process of S901, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values. Determine.

  As a result of the processing in S901, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability changing flag is on (S902). If it is determined that the probability changing flag is on (S902). (S902: Yes), according to the value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, the number of wins to the specific winning openings 65a, 650a per round of the jackpot game is determined (S903). In other words, in one round of the jackpot game, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened until the number of winning balls per round of the jackpot game determined in S903 is won in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 360 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o, and when the probability variation period measurement counter 203p at the time of jackpot determination is a value corresponding to less than 60 seconds, the number of winnings per round Is 10 pieces. Similarly, in the case of 60 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds, the number of winnings per round is nine. In the case of 120 seconds or more and less than 180 seconds, the number of winnings per round is eight. In the case of 180 seconds or more and less than 240 seconds, the number of winnings per round is seven. In the case of 240 seconds or more and less than 300 seconds, the number of winnings per round is six. In the case of 300 seconds or more, the number of winnings per round is five. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, when 15 balls are paid out as a winning ball, if the number of winning balls per round is 10, the number of winning balls per round is 150. Is determined. As a result, when a big hit is made during a probability change, the earlier the period of time since the start of the probability change (the smaller the value of the probability change period measurement counter 203p), the larger the number of winning and winning balls per round of the jackpot game. And more.

  If it is determined that the probability variation flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S902: No), the number of winning balls is determined (S904). In the present embodiment, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened until 10 balls are won in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a in one round of the jackpot game. When one ball enters the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, when 15 balls are paid out as a winning ball, if the number of winning balls per round is 10, the number of winning balls per round is 150. Is determined.

<Operational effect of technical idea 9>
In the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the jackpot lottery process (S901) during the probability change, in the process of S903, the smaller the value of the probability change period measurement counter 203p, the greater the number of prize balls to be given to the player. Configured. That is, the earlier the elapsed period from the start of probability change, the greater the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.

  For example, in the case of a pachinko machine where a new probability change is started after a jackpot game if a big hit is made during the probability change, the player wishes that the player wants a big hit at an early stage after the probability change has started. It is. According to the pachinko machine 10, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the number of prize balls also increases, so that the player is pleased twice. On the other hand, if a big hit is made at a late stage after the start of probability change, the number of prize balls is small and the player is disappointed. On the other hand, if it is decided that a probabilistic change will be started after the jackpot, not only will it be discouraged, but new hopes can be found. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variation period is set to a certain period by the probability variation object 700 has an effect of providing a new interest corresponding to the probability variation period and the number of prize balls.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winnings per round is increased / decreased according to the remaining time (elapsed time) of the probability variation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be always constant. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the hit of the big hit game constant, and to keep the gambling ability constant.

  After determining the number of prize balls in the processing of S903 or S904, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Then, the display mode for the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S905). Here, when the special figure type flag is on, it means that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the second entrance 640. Therefore, the jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) starting from now on is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is used as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of S905 is a probable jackpot (S906). That is, when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot, it is a probability variation jackpot, and when the jackpot type is 15R normal jackpot, it is not a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is a probable big hit (S906: Yes), the probable change start scheduled flag 203m is turned on (S907), and the process proceeds to S908. If it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S906: No), the process proceeds to S908.

  By turning on the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m in the process of S907, when the ball is subsequently entered into the through switch 701 when it is not a big hit, since the electric tulip 702 is released (see FIG. 16), high probability It becomes easy to make the ball enter the probability change generation switch 703 that triggers the transition to the state.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the game is not a big hit (S901: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S910). In the processing of S910, in the case of a variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is displayed, and the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is performed. In this case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third mode is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, whether the front / rear out of reach, the reach other than the front / rear out, or the complete out is set. Next, the process proceeds to S908.

  In the process of S908, a variation pattern is determined (S908). This variation pattern is determined by determining the value of the variation type counter CS1, the big hit variation pattern table 202c, the deviating variation pattern table 202d (the deviating (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the deviating (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2). Based on. In step S908, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is set.

  A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S905 or S910 is set (S909), and this process ends. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15). Sent.

<NMI interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

<Start-up process>
Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105), and if not stored (S1105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1111 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, the process also proceeds to S1111. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1207 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1112, S1113) of RAM 203 after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1112, S1113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1112 and S1113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1112, S1113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an interrupt is permitted (S1110). In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is set, and thereafter the effect by the sub control device is permitted. And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Although not shown in the figure, the probability variation rotator 704 is subjected to initial setting and processing to return to the state before power-off in this startup processing. When the power is cut off during the probability variation period, the rotation amount of the probability variation rotator 704 is set based on the value of the remaining probability variation period. If the power change occurs when the probability change period is set, and then the RAM erase switch is turned on and the power is turned on, the remaining probability change period is set to 0, and the probability change rotator 704 is set. Is set to “angle A1”.

  In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the probability variation rotator 704 is backed up to the state when the power is cut off. However, the probability variation rotator 704 is not limited to this and is rotated. Instead, the remaining probability variation period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the probability variation rotator 704 may be rotated to “angle A2” based on the probability variation period becoming zero.

  In addition, when the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n is 2 or more, a probability variation period corresponding to the value is set, displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability variation period is set. May be. With this configuration, even if the power interruption occurs during the probability variation period, and the game ball in the probability variation object 700 is discharged by the initial setting process or the like, the probability variation period is not set correctly after the power is turned on again. Can be suppressed.

<Main processing>
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. As an outline, the counter update process of S1203 and S1204 is executed with a remaining time of a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

  In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: No), a power failure monitoring circuit is determined. The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1202). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the process of S1201 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1202: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1203, S1204).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1203). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1204). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds even during the execution of each process of S1201 to S1204, the process of S1203 and the process of S1204 are executed for 4 milliseconds. The remaining time of the cycle is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1201, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1201: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S1205 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1205), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1206). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1207), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1208), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

<Flowchart of Audio Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

<Start-up process>
First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S2117 (see FIG. 28) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 28), it executes a power-off process in S2117. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S2117 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S2117, the sound lamp control is performed. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). Transition to processing. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2117 is executed (see S2117 in FIG. 28). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2117 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S2004 to S2006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and interrupt permission is set. In step S2011, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S2009 is that when the process from S2004 to S2006 is reached via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

<Main processing>
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If the time has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2112 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2111.

  Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S2101 is processing related to display (production) in S2102 to S2111, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S2112 and the command determination process of S2113 in a short cycle.

  By executing the command determination process of S2113 at a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed.

  By executing the fluctuation display process of S2112 in a short cycle, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the command determination process.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2109 described later are set (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed (S2105), and then the hold number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on the hold lamp 285 is performed in accordance with the number of held balls of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S2108). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a lamp editing process is executed (S2109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2110). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the audio data stored in the RAM 223 is decoded according to the display command (including the reach display command) from the display control device 114 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the decoded audio of all the channels is mixed and the sound is output from the audio output device 226. When an alarm sound output is set, an alarm sound output pattern is set by the sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226.

  After the process of S2110, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S2109 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process in S2110 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of S2111, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, a variable display process, which is a process for setting the generated commands to be transmitted to the display control device 114, is executed (S2112).

  In the process of S2112, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this variation display process, a plurality of counters (a counter for setting a stop symbol at the time of big hit, a counter for selecting a stop symbol at the time of disconnection, etc.) mounted on the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. Based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the control device 110, a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, or a variation display pattern (short deviation, long deviation, normal reach, super reach, special Reach) is set. The set stop symbol and variation pattern are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

  Next, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2113). When a command from the main control device 110 is received, if the command is used in the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the command, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 233, and used in the display control device 114. If it is a command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The confirmation command, the probability variation end command, the probability variation abnormality command, and the production permission command from the main control device 110 are transmitted to the display control device 114 as they are.

  When the processing of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

<Flowchart of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2601). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Also, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  After the process of S2601, interrupt permission is set (S2602), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2603), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 14) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2701) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2702) is executed. In the command determination process (S2701), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. To the display data table buffer 233a. As one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a, time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table is set in the time counter 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and the aspect of the continuous notice effect are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the aspect The image drawing can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The command determination process (S2701) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S2701, a display setting process is executed (S2702). In the display setting process (S2702), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S2701) or the like, the third symbol display device is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. In 81, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specifically specified. In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the display contents (see FIG. 13) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, A display command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content is generated, and processing for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are sequentially displayed from the display contents specified in advance. A display command is generated, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a command (for example, display variation) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like in the display control device 114 by the command determination process and the display setting process. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to the pattern command), etc., the display data table should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

  When a program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, it is complicated and complicated with the diversification of effect images. Since an enormous load is applied to the process of starting up and executing an enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Also, in the display setting process (S2702), if the jackpot is in effect, the jackpot effect display setting is made, and the number of jackpot rounds displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning balls, the background that is different for each round, etc. Display settings are made. If the probability change is in progress, the display setting of the period until the probability change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ends (or the elapsed period from the start of the probability change) is made. Each time the display setting process (S2702) is executed, the time counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  After the display setting process (S2702) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2703). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2702). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2704). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 14 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2703), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and transfer instructions. And stored in the drawing list area 233c. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list.

<Command judgment processing>
Next, a command determination process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command determination process is executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30), analyzes the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area, and executes a process according to the command.

  When the command interrupt process is executed, it is first determined whether or not a display variation pattern command has been received (S2801). When the display variation pattern command is received (S2801: Yes), the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233a (S2802). Then, the changing flag 233f is turned on (S2803), and the process proceeds to S2804. When the changing flag 233f is on, a changing effect corresponding to the display changing pattern command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2804.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received (S2804). When the confirmation command is received (S2804: Yes), the changing flag 233f is turned off (S2805). When the changing flag 233f is turned off, the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed by the drawing process (S2704 in FIG. 30). After S2805, the process proceeds to S2806. The time from when the display variation pattern command is received (S2801: Yes) to when the confirmation command is received, that is, the variation effect period is as described with reference to FIGS. 8C and 8D. However, it varies depending on the variation pattern. The variation production period of the present embodiment is a short out of 7 seconds, a long out of 10 seconds, normal reach of various 30 seconds, super reach of various 60 seconds, and special reach of various 90 seconds. If the confirmation command has not been received (S2804: No), the process proceeds to S2806.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an effect permission command set in the startup process (see FIG. 25) of the main controller 110 has been received (S2806). When the production permission command is received (S2806: Yes), the production permission flag 233e is turned on (S2807). From the time when the effect permission flag 233e is turned on, the effect is displayed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, when the production permission command has not been received (S2806: No), the process proceeds to S2808.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a probability change end command has been received (S2808). When the probability change end command is received (S2808: Yes), data for displaying “probability change end” on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2809). On the other hand, if the probability change end command has not been received (S2808: No), the process proceeds to S2810.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a probability change abnormality command has been received (S2810). When the probability variation abnormality command is received (S2810: Yes), data for displaying “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2811). On the other hand, if the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2810: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

  Next, it is determined whether or not another command has been received (S2812). When another command is received (S2812: Yes), a process corresponding to the other command (S2813) is executed, and this process ends. When the probability variation abnormality command has not been received (S2812: No), this process ends.

<Operational effects of technical ideas 1 to 3>
As described above, during the probability variation period according to the present embodiment, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the sphere of the probability variation rotator 704. The probability variation end switch 707 rotates the probability variation rotor motor 704a of the probability variation rotor 704 at a constant speed by the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21) for the ball stopped on the receiving unit 704b. This is the period from when a sphere is detected to the end of probability change in the probability change end process (see FIG. 19). In other words, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation was started).

  In conventional gaming machines, the variation production period tends to be longer (for example, the fluctuation production effect of losing) as the variation production period (for example, normal reach, super reach, special reach) with high reliability of the jackpot is higher. The period is 7 seconds, while the special reach variation production period is 90 seconds). Since the player is interested in the jackpot that is advantageous to him / her, even if the variation rendering period is long, the player wants to see the variation rendering with high reliability of the jackpot.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that a variation pattern (for example, special reach (90 seconds)) having a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period among the variation patterns described with reference to FIG. However, since the probability variation period is a certain period due to the probability variable object 700, the probability variation period does not become longer due to the variation rendering period. In the conventional ST machine, even if a variation pattern with a large jackpot reliability and a long fluctuation production period is made multiple times during probability change, there is no big hit, and the game becomes monotonous simply by increasing the probability change period. This could cause discomfort to the player. According to the pachinko machine 10, even if a variation effect with a large jackpot reliability and a long variation effect period is performed, the “probable longest change period” is constant. Pleasure can be reduced.

  Then, a variation pattern with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation presentation period is not executed, and a variation pattern with a short variation presentation period with a low jackpot reliability is short (for example, a short deviation (7 seconds), a long deviation (10 seconds)). Is executed, the remaining period until the probability change ends is less reduced than when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation effect period is executed. As a result, more chances to win a lottery are left.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern with a high jackpot reliability and a long variation production period is executed, and a variation pattern with a short jackpot reliability is not executed with a short variation pattern, the remaining period until the probability change ends is There is more reduction than when a variation pattern with a short variation production period is executed. Therefore, if a big hit is not made in the variation production, the chances of the big hit lottery are reduced. Thereby, the player's desire to make a big hit inevitably increases in the variation effect. In other words, the enthusiasm for the variation effect is heightened.

  Therefore, the degree of reduction of the jackpot lottery opportunity varies depending on the variation effect executed in the probability change, so that it is possible to provide a new gameability to the player. Further, the player can predict the end of the probability change from the movement of the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the probability variation rotating body. The ball stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 is rotated at a constant speed by the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 by the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), and the probability variation ends. This is the period from when the switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere until the probability variation ends in the probability variation end processing (see FIG. 19). In other words, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation was started).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the ball entry and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the probability variation. Probability change period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33) is performed only when the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is changing for the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the rotating body 704. Thus, the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated at a constant speed, and the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere, and the period until the probability variation ends in the probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). It becomes. That is, the probability variation period elapses only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is changing since the probability variation is started. That is, the probability change ends after the variation effect is made for a predetermined period after the probability change is started.

  Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in the execution timing of the probability variation period progression processing (S702 in FIG. 22) executed in the variation processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Except for this point, the second embodiment is the same as the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Angle of probability variation 704 and elapsed time from probability variation start>
With reference to Fig.32 (a)-(b), operation | movement of the probability variable 700 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIGS. 32A and 32B schematically show the relationship between the angle of the probability variation rotator 704 of the probability variation object 700 arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 and the elapsed time from the probability variation start. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, and FIG. 32B is a schematic diagram when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32A, the relationship between the angle of the probability variation rotator 704 and the elapsed time from the start of probability variation when the variation effect is not interrupted during probability variation will be described. The time ta0 is a time when a sphere enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entry of the sphere. At time ta0, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation is started by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17).

  The time ta1 is the time when 1 second has elapsed from the time ta0, and the time when the probability varying rotor 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotor motor 704a (see FIG. 10A)).

  The time ta2 is the time when 120 seconds have elapsed from the time ta1, and the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. In the middle of doing At this time, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A3” state (see FIG. 10B).

  The time ta3 is the time when 240 seconds have elapsed from the time ta2, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. In the present embodiment, the time until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 are overlapped without stopping after the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating (at time ta1). To ta3) is 360 seconds. During this time, the sphere that is stationary on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. This is performed every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability change period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 33) of S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). This is because the “angle AX” is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is varying.

  The time ta4 is substantially the same as the time ta3, and the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharge portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is. At ta4, the probability change is terminated by a probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). At ta4, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. After the time ta4, the probability changing rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of the “angle A1” (see S405 in FIG. 19), and by the time ta5 after 0.5 second from the time ta4, The probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees, the probability variation rotator of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 to the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver thereof) of the probability variation rotator 704 at ta4. The MPU 201 controls the probability variable rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the motor 704 a at “speed of 600 degrees per second counterclockwise”. As long as the variation effect is not interrupted during the probability change, the “maximum probability change period”, which is the period from time ta0 to time ta4, is about 361 seconds.

  A lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 have entered during the probability change period (period from ta0 to ta4). This lottery is performed by the jackpot random number table 202a in the “high probability state”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32B, the relationship between the angle of the probability changing rotator 704 and the elapsed time from the start of the probability change when the variation effect is interrupted during the probability change will be described. The time tb0 is a time when a ball enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At tb0, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation is started by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17).

  The time tb1 is the time when 1 second has elapsed from the time tb0, and the time when the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a (see FIG. 10A).

  tb2 is the time when 120 seconds have elapsed since tb1. Before tb2, for example, a failure of the ball launching unit 112a that launches a ball to the game board 13, a nail on the game board 13 is jammed, and the game board to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 This is a case where the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are not entered due to factors such as the nail 13 being tightened. At tb2, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b become 0, and thereafter, the fluctuating effect is not executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is changing, the probability variation rotating body 704 is obtained by the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33). The probability variation rotating body motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed. Thereby, in the state where the fluctuating effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 32B, the probability variation rotator 704 does not rotate and continues to stop at the “angle A3”. That is, in the state where the variation effect is not executed, the probability variation period does not elapse.

  The time tb3 is when about 120 seconds have elapsed from the time tb2. This is a time when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 before tb3 and a new variation effect is started. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is changing, the probability variation rotating body 704 is obtained by the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 33). Since the probability variation rotor motor 704a is rotated at a constant speed, the probability variation rotor 704 starts rotating at a constant speed around the probability variation rotor motor 704a from tb3. In other words, if it is changing, the probability change period elapses.

  The time tb4 is the time when 240 seconds have elapsed from the time tb4, and the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 are overlapped (see FIG. 10C). That is, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. In the present embodiment, the total variation time (from tb1 time) until the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 are overlapped after the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating. The sum of tb2 o'clock and tb3 o'clock to tb4 o'clock) is 360 seconds. During this time, the sphere that is stationary on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 rotates at a constant speed around the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704. This is performed every 2 milliseconds that is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the probability change period progress process (see FIG. 22) of S702 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 33) of S109 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). This is because the “angle AX” is rotated clockwise only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is varying.

  Time tb5 is substantially the same as time tb4, and when the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 flows down the path 707a below the ball discharge portion 706 and is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. It is. At tb5, the probability change is terminated by a probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). After the time tb5, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise so as to be in the state of the “angle A1”, and the probability variation rotator 704 is changed to the “angle” by tb6 after 0.5 seconds from the time tb5. The state becomes “A1”. A lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 have entered during this probability change period (period from tb0 to tb5). This lottery is performed by the jackpot random number table 202a in the “high probability state”.

<Variation processing>
With reference to FIG. 33, the fluctuation | variation process (S109) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 33 shows a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment.

  This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancement process (see FIG. 22) is also performed in which the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated to advance the probability variation period. The variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation processing in the second embodiment (FIG. 33) are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the execution timing of the probability variation period progression processing (S702 in FIG. 22) is different. The form is the same.

  In the first embodiment, if it is not a big hit (S701: No in FIG. 22), the probability variation period progress process (S702) is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and the change time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S715), and then the probability variation period progress processing (S702) is executed (S702 of FIG. 33). Thus, the probability variation period can be configured to elapse only when the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is changing after the probability variation is started. That is, the probability change ends after the variation effect is made for a predetermined period after the probability change is started.

<Operational effect of technical idea 4>
For example, a failure of the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball to the game board 13, a nail on the game board 13 is clogged with a ball, and the nail on the game board 13 to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 There may be a case where it is difficult or difficult to make the ball enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 due to factors such as being tightened. In these cases, if the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 approaches the probability variation end switch 707 (the ball discharge portion 706), the chances of lottery during probability variation decrease. Can not secure the profits of the elderly. According to the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, unless the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is reliably terminated. The switch 707 (the ball discharge unit 706) is not approached, and the chances of the lottery during the probable change are not reduced, so that the player's profit can be protected. In this embodiment, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to rotate when the special symbol is fluctuating. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time when the special symbol is variably displayed is added (aggregated). The probability varying rotator 704 may be rotated at a predetermined angle with respect to the total time. By comprising in this way, the fixed rotation amount can be rotated with respect to the variation time of a special symbol.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entrance of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), and then the probability variation rotating body. The ball stopped at the ball receiving portion 704b of 704 is rotated at a constant speed by the probability variation rotating body motor 704a of the probability variation rotating body 704 by the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22 executed in FIG. 21), and the probability variation ends. This is the period from when the switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere until the probability variation ends in the probability variation end processing (see FIG. 19). In other words, the probability variation period is constant (the probability variation ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the probability variation was started).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation generation switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts probability variation by probability variation start processing (see FIG. 17). At the start of probability change, a score (50 points in this embodiment) representing the probability change period is given. Probability change period progress processing (for example, 2 seconds) immediately before the change effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is stopped for the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 after the probability variation is started. 37 (see FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability variation rotator motor 704a of the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated at an angle (number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect at once, and the probability variation period is set according to the variation pattern. The number of points to be advanced (hereinafter “probability change point number”) is added. The “progression period progress score” is 1 point for short out, 1 point for long out, 2 for various types of normal reach, 3 for various types of super reach, and 5 for various types of special reach. When the total value of the “probability change period progress points” is equal to or greater than the score representing the probability change period (50 points in this embodiment), the probability change rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state. 704 is operated. Here, the rotation angle of the probability variation rotator 704 corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point” is ““ angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704 ”÷ (number of points representing the probability variation period (50 points))”. Since it can be calculated, the rotation angle of the probability variation rotator 704 corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point” is 6 degrees. For each variation effect, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated by a different angle for each variation pattern. As a result, when the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of the sphere. Then, the probability variation ends in the probability variation end process (see FIG. 19). That is, after the probability change is started, the probability change period elapses for each change pattern for a different period for each change pattern.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment includes a partial configuration of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, a partial configuration of the ROM 202, and a part of the variation processing (FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 201. This process is the same as the first embodiment except that a part of the process of the variation start process (FIG. 38) and a part of the probability change period progress process (FIG. 39) are different. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Probability change period deduction memory 203r>
Various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) shows various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically.

  First, FIG. 34A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In addition to the data of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a probability variation period deduction memory 203r is provided.

  The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is a memory that stores “the number of probability variation period progress points”. “Probability change period progress score” is 1 point for short out, 1 point for long out, 2 points for normal reach, 3 points for various super reach, and 5 points for special reach.

  The probability change period deduction memory 203r is set to 0 as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). At the start of the fluctuation effect by the MPU 201, in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 38), the “probability change period progress points” is set in the probability change period deduction memory 203r. The probability variation period deduction memory 203r is used to add a value to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p in the probability variation period progression processing (see FIG. 39) immediately before the variation time of the variation effect started before (for example, 2 seconds before). Used to rotate the probability variation rotator 704. With the probability variation period deduction memory 203r, the probability variation rotator 704 can be rotated immediately before the variation time of the variation effect elapses. Note that the rotation angle of the probability variation rotator 704 corresponding to one point of the value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period progress point number”) is 6 degrees.

  Next, FIG. 34B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. Instead of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a jackpot variation pattern table 202e is provided. Instead of the variation pattern table 202d for removal of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a variation pattern for release. It has a table 202f.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202e is a table in which “probability variation period progress points” is added to each variation pattern of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c in the first embodiment.

  The deviation variation pattern table 202f is a table in which “probability variation period progress points” is added to each variation pattern of the deviation variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 35A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. “Probability change period progress points” is added to the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. "Probability change period score" is 2 points for various types of normal reach, 3 points for various types of super reach, and 5 points for various types of special reach.

  FIG. 35B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the third embodiment. “Probability change period progress points” is added to the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8D) stored in the ROM 202 in the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, there are two outlier variation pattern tables during normal and probable variation, the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 8E). Although there are two, there is one deviation variation pattern table in the third embodiment. “Probability change period progress score” is 1 point for short out, 1 point for long out, 2 points for normal reach, 3 points for various super reach, and 5 points for special reach.

<Total value of elapsed time from the start of probability change and the number of progress points during probability change>
Next, the operation of the probability variable 700 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the elapsed time from the start of probability change and the total value of the “probability change period progress points”.

  The time t0 is a time when a ball enters the electric tulip 702 and the probability change generation switch 703 detects the ball entering. At time t0, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state, and the probability variation is started by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17). At the start of probability change, a score representing the probability change period (in this embodiment, 50 points) is given. From t0, execution of super reach (60 seconds, 3 points) is started as the first variation effect during probability variation.

  The time t1 is the time when 58 seconds have elapsed from the time t0, and the time when the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a two seconds before the variation time elapses. The probability variation body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of “probability variation period progress point”, and has finished rotating by t2. In the variation process (see FIG. 37), the probability variation period progression process (see FIG. 39) is executed 2 seconds before the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed, and in the probability variation period progression process, the probability variation rotating body 704 is moved in 2 seconds. This is because it is rotated (see S3205 in FIG. 39). Note that, as described above, the angle corresponding to one point of the “probability period progress point” is 6 degrees.

  The time t2 is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from the time t1, and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated from “angle A1” to an angle (18 degrees) corresponding to three points of the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”. State. At t2, the super reach variation effect is stopped, and a short deviation (7 seconds, 1 point) is started as the next variation effect.

  The time t3 is the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the time t2, and the time when the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a two seconds before the variation time elapses. The probability variation body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point”, and has finished rotating by t4.

  The time t4 is a time when 2 seconds have elapsed from the time t3, and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated from “angle A1” to an angle (24 degrees) corresponding to four points of the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”. State. At t4, the short deviating variation effect is stopped, and the long deviating (10 seconds, one point) is started as the next variation effect.

  The time t5 is the time when 8 seconds have elapsed from the time t4, and the time when the probability varying rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotator motor 704a two seconds before the variation time elapses. The probability variation body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (6 degrees) corresponding to one point of the “probability variation period progress point”, and has finished rotating by t6.

  The time t6 is a time when 2 seconds have elapsed from the time t5, and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated from “angle A1” to an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”. State. At t6, the extraordinary variation effect is stopped, and normal reach (30 seconds, two points) is started as the next variation effect.

  The time t7 is the time when 28 seconds have elapsed from the time t6, and the time when the probability varying rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability varying rotator motor 704a two seconds before the variation time elapses. The probability variation body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (12 degrees) corresponding to two points of “probability variation progress points”, and has finished rotating by t8.

  The time t8 is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from the time t7, and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated from “angle A1” to an angle (42 degrees) corresponding to seven points of the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”. State. At t8, the normal reach variation effect is stopped, and the special reach (90 seconds, 5 points) is started as the next variation effect.

  The time t9 is the time when 88 seconds have elapsed from the time t8, and the time when the probability variation rotator 704 starts rotating clockwise around the probability variation rotator motor 704a two seconds before the variation time elapses. The probability variation body 704 rotates from the current angle by an angle (30 degrees) corresponding to five points of “probability variation period progress point”, and has finished rotating by t10 o'clock.

  The time t10 is the time when 2 seconds have elapsed from the time t9, and the probability variation rotator 704 rotates from “angle A1” to an angle (72 degrees) corresponding to 12 points of the total value of the “probability variation period progress points”. State. At t10, the jackpot is determined by the special reach variation effect, and then the jackpot game is started.

  In FIG. 36, the case where a big hit is made during probability change has been described. However, if the big hit is not made during probability change, the total value of the “probability change period progress points” is a score representing the probability change period given at the start of the probability change (this implementation) Probability continues until it reaches 50 points in the form.

<Variation processing>
With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37, the fluctuation | variation process (S109) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 37 shows the fluctuation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment.

  This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation period advancement process (see FIG. 39) is also performed in which the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated to advance the probability variation period. The variation processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation processing in the third embodiment (FIG. 37) are the probability variation period progression processing (see FIG. 22 for the first embodiment and FIG. 39 for the third embodiment). This is the same as the first embodiment except that the execution timing of is different.

  In the first embodiment, if the jackpot is not being hit (S701 in FIG. 22), the probability change period progress process (S702 in FIG. 22) is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, in the process of S703, it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S703: Yes), and the change time has not elapsed (S714). : No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S715). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is two seconds before the change time has elapsed (S3001). Exit. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed 2 seconds before (S3001: Yes), the probability variation period progress process (see FIG. 39) is executed (S3002), and this process ends. Thereby, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation time of the variation effect elapses. The probability variation period progress process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the variation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 38 shows a variation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment.

  In contrast to the variation start process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 23), the variation start process (FIG. 38) of the third embodiment is that the process of S3101 is added as a process immediately before the end of the variation start process. Different. In the process of S3101, a point “probability variation period progress point” based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table (the jackpot variation pattern table 202e or the deviation variation pattern table 202f) is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r ( S3101). That is, for the variation pattern, the point value set in the variable period deduction memory 203r is 1 point for short out, 1 point for long out, 2 for various normal reach, 3 for various super reach, and 3 for special reach. 5 points. Thereby, in the probability variation period advance processing (see FIG. 39) executed immediately before the variation time of the variation effect, the probability variation period can be advanced according to the value set in the variable period deduction memory 203r.

<Probability change process>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39, the probability change period progress process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a probability variation period progress process (S3002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The probability variation period progress processing (S3002) is processing executed in the variation processing (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated to perform probability variation. It is a process of advancing the period.

  In the probability variation period progress processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203l is on (S3201). If it is determined that the probability changing flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S3201: No), this processing is terminated. As a result, even if the probability change period progress process is executed except during the probability change, the processes of S3202 to S3208 are not executed. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203l is on (S3201: Yes), the probability variation period measurement counter 203p determines whether or not the value is greater than or equal to the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202), and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is the probability variation period memory. When the value is not equal to or greater than the value 203o (ie, less than S2032: No), the value corresponding to the probability variation period deduction memory 203r is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S3203). Thereby, the process of S3203-S3206 can be performed only when the probability variation period should be advanced (S3202: No).

  Here, the value set in the probability variation period memory 203o is a value corresponding to a period during which the probability variation rotator 704 rotates until the probability variation rotator 704 changes from the "angle A1" state to the "angle A2" state. Is set. In the probability variation period memory 203o, in the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), as in the first embodiment, 180,000 corresponding to 360 seconds (= 360 seconds ÷ (timer interrupt process execution interval (2 milliseconds)). (Refer to S304 in Fig. 17.) In the third embodiment, the probability variation rotator 704 rotates during the period from the "angle A1" state to the "angle A2" state. The corresponding value, that is, the score representing the probability variation period is 50. Therefore, in the process of S3203, unlike the first embodiment, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is “value of probability variation period deduction memory 203r ÷ The value calculated by “number of points representing probability change period (50 points) × value of probability change period memory 203o (180000)” is added. One point is set in the memory 203r in the variation start process (see S3101 in Fig. 38) Therefore, in the process in S3203, "value of the probability variation period measurement counter 203p x 3600" is set in the probability variation period measurement counter 203p. to add.

  After the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is greater than or equal to the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3204). If the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not greater than or equal to the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (that is, less than). (S3204: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY” corresponding to the value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r (“probability variation period progress point number”) (S3205). Here, “angle AY” can be calculated by “value of probability variation period deduction memory 203r ÷ (number of points representing probability variation period (50 points)) × (angle A1-A2 (300 degrees) of probability variation rotor 704)”. . For example, when the variation pattern is not too short, one point is set in the probability variation period deduction memory 203r in the variation start process (see S3101 in FIG. 38). Accordingly, in the processing of S3205, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise from the current angle by “angle AY (value of the probability variation period deduction memory 203r × 6 degrees)”. In order to complete the “angle AY” rotation by 2 seconds after the fluctuating effect is stopped, the MPV 201 rotates the probabilistic rotating body 704 with respect to the probable rotating body motor 704a (the motor driver thereof) with respect to the probable rotating body motor 704a. A predetermined command for rotating the motor 704 a at “clockwise“ angle AY ”/ 2 speed per second” is output. Thereby, according to the variation pattern of the variation effect, the probability variation period can be advanced immediately before the variation effect is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3204: Yes), the probability variation rotator 704 is set to “ Rotate clockwise to “angle A2” (S3206), and the process ends. When the ball receiver 704 b and the ball discharger 706 overlap, the ball in the ball receiver 704 b is discharged from the ball discharger 706. The discharged sphere flows down the path 707a below the sphere discharge unit 706 and is detected by the probability change end switch 707 (see S207 in FIG. 16). In response to this detection, the probability variation is terminated in the probability variation termination process (see FIG. 19).

  In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the value of the probability variation period memory 203o (S3202: Yes), the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207), and a probability variation abnormality command is set ( S3208), the process is terminated. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31) and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Operational effect of technical idea 6>
For example, it is assumed that during the probability change, the probability variable rotator motor 704a breaks down, or the line connecting the probability variable rotator motor 704a and the MPU 201 is illegally disconnected, so that the rotation of the probability variable rotator 704 stops. To do. As long as the rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 continues to stop, the sphere stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotator 704 does not reach the ball discharge portion 706. In other words, a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704 b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is not detected by the probability variation end switch 707. Further, for example, in order to prevent illegally discharging a ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b to the path 707a in a state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharging portion 706 are overlapped, Even if an illegal act of applying a magnet to the front side of the ball discharge unit 706 outside the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the ball stopped on the ball receiving unit 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is discharged. The part 706 is not reached. As a result, the probability change can be extended illegally.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10, if it is determined in S3202 from the probability variation period measurement counter 203p and the probability variation period memory 203o that the probability variation period has elapsed, the probability variation flag is turned off (S3207). Since the probability change is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the probability change from being illegally extended as described above.

<Operational effect of technical idea 5>
According to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, during the probability variation period, the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere and starts the probability variation by the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17). At the start of probability change, a score (50 points in this embodiment) representing the probability change period is given. Probability change period progress processing (for example, 2 seconds) immediately before the change effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is stopped for the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 after the probability variation is started. 37 (see FIG. 39 executed in FIG. 37), the probability varying rotor motor 704a of the probability varying rotor 704 is rotated at an angle (number of steps) according to the variation pattern of the variation effect at once. Thereby, when a player who knows the amount of rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 corresponding to the variation effect visually recognizes the variation effect, how much the ball stopped on the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is certain. It can be determined whether the end switch 707 (the ball discharge unit 706) is approached. That is, there is an effect that the end of the probability change can be predicted from the variation effect.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment can have the same effect as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment based on the component same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to inspect whether or not the probable agent 700 has failed during the jackpot game (the probability change can be started) with respect to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. To determine whether or not) has been added.

  Note that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment includes a partial configuration of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110, switch read processing (FIGS. 41 and 42) executed by the MPU 201, and variation processing (FIG. 45). ) And part of the variation start process (FIG. 46) are the same as in the first embodiment except that the process is different from the process in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Probability changeable determination flag 203s>
Various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment. In addition to the data stored in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a probability changeable determination flag 203s is provided.

  The probability change possibility determination flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not to start a probability change possibility determination process for inspecting whether the probability variable character 700 is out of order. When the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is on, the probability change possibility determination process is started. When the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is off, the probability change possibility determination process is not started. The probability change possibility determination flag 203s is used to determine whether or not to start the probability change possibility determination process (see FIG. 47) by the MPU 201.

  This probability changeable determination flag 203s is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 (see S1113 in FIG. 25). When the probability variation jackpot (the above-mentioned 15R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot) is determined (see FIG. 46), the probability variation possibility determination flag 203s is turned on, and the ball can enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703 during the jackpot game. In the probability change possibility determination start process (see FIG. 43), when the probability change possibility determination process (see FIG. 47) is started, the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned off.

<Switch reading process>
Next, a switch reading process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the switch reading process (S106). The switch reading process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). This is a process of detecting and executing a process according to the detection.

  In the switch reading process (FIG. 41) of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined Yes in the process of S4001 (“A” in FIG. 41), the process of shifting to the process of S211 (“B” in FIG. 41), Is different from the switch reading process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 16).

  When the switch reading process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S4001). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is not a big hit (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S201. The processing of S201 to S211 is the same as the switch reading processing (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to S4002 (see “A” in FIG. 42). As a result, it is possible to execute processing capable of entering a ball into the probability change occurrence switch 703 during the big hit game. In the process of S4002, it is detected whether or not a ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002). Here, the ball entering the through switch 701 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the through switch 701 (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability variable determination flag 203s is on in order to determine whether the electric tulip 702 should be opened. (S4003). If it is determined that the possibility variable determination flag 203s is on (S4003: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is opened (the electric accessory 702a is opened) (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. As a result, a ball can enter the probability variation generation switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. On the other hand, if the possibility variable determination flag 203s is not on (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005. As a result, even if the ball enters the through switch 701, if the electric tulip 702 is not in a state to be opened, it is possible to maintain a state in which the ball does not enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. . Note that when the probability change big hit (the above-mentioned 15R probability change big hit or 4R probability change big hit) is determined in the jackpot lottery process (see S901 in FIG. 46) of the MPU 201, the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned on (see S907 in FIG. 23). Therefore, the electric tulip 702 can be opened by entering the ball into the through switch 701 during the jackpot game after the probability variation jackpot is determined, and the ball is inserted into the probability variation occurrence switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702. To be able to. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the through switch 701 (S4002: No), the process proceeds to S4005.

  Next, in the process of S4005, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005). Here, a ball entering the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has entered the probability change generation switch 703 (S4005: Yes), the electric tulip 702 is closed (the electric accessory 702a is closed) (S4006), and the probability change possibility determination start process (S4007) is performed. After executing, the process proceeds to S4008. As a result, a ball enters the opened electric tulip 702, and the electric tulip 702 is closed when detected by the probability variation occurrence switch 703 near the entrance, so that a large amount of spheres are placed inside the probability variation object 700 ( For example, up to 4) The probability change possibility determination start process will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change occurrence switch 703 (S4005: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  Next, in the process of S4008, it is detected whether or not the ball has entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008). Here, the ball entering the probability variation end switch 707 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008: Yes), a probability change possibility determination end process (S4009) is executed, and the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. The probability change possibility determination end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined that the ball has not entered the probability change end switch 707 (S4008: No), the process proceeds to S211 in FIG. In the process of S211, other processes are executed (S211), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

<Probability change start processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the probability change possibility determination start process (S4007) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the probability change possibility determination start processing (S4007). Probability changeable determination start processing (S4007) is executed in switch reading processing (see FIGS. 41 and 42) executed in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and enters the probability change occurrence switch 703. This is a process for starting a process of inspecting whether or not the probability variable actor 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determining whether or not the probability change can be started).

  When the probability changeable determination start process is executed, first, a probability variable actor that is a counter that stores the number of balls entering the inside of the probability variable actor 700 (between the probability change occurrence switch 703 and the probability change end switch 707). 1 is added to the entrance counter 203n (S4101). Next, it is determined whether or not the possibility variable determination flag 203s is on (S4102). If it is determined that the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is not on (that is, is off) (S4102: No), the probability change possibility determination start process is terminated, and the process returns to the switch reading process (see FIG. 42).

  If the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103). Next, 0 is set in the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4104), and a value corresponding to the scheduled period of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S4105). In the present embodiment, 15000 (= 30 seconds ÷ (timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period of 30 seconds for the probability change possibility determination is set in the probability change period memory 203o. The scheduled period 30 seconds for the probability change possibility determination is a period during which the probability change rotator 704 rotates until the probability change rotator 704 changes from the “angle A1” state to the “angle A2” state.

  Here, the processing of S4103 to S4105 is processing for starting the probability change possible determination processing. Here, if the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is on (S4102: Yes), the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103) even if a plurality of balls enter the probability change occurrence switch 703. This is because the process for starting the probability change possibility determination process is executed only when the ball is entered for the first time. That is, when the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the first ball entering, the probability variation possibility determination flag 203s is on, so that all the processes of S4101 to S4105 are executed. Next, when the probability change generation switch 703 detects the entrance of the second sphere, since the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned off (S4103), the processing of S4101 and S4102 is executed, and the processing of S4103 to S4105 is performed. Is not executed. Thereby, even if a plurality of balls enter the probability variation occurrence switch 703, the probability variation determination process can be started.

<Probability changeable end processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the probability change possibility determination end process (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this probability change possibility determination end processing (S4009). Probability changeable determination end processing (S4009) is executed in the switch reading processing (see FIGS. 41 and 42) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) and enters the probability change end switch 707. This is a process of ending the process of checking whether or not the probability variable actor 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determining whether or not the probability change can be started).

  When the probable change possible determination end process is executed, first, the probable change object entering ball counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S4201), and the probable change start scheduled flag 203m is turned on to schedule the start of the probable change (S4202). As a result, when a ball is inserted into the through switch 701 when the jackpot is not being hit, the electric tulip 702 is released (see FIG. 41), so that the probability change occurrence switch 703 that triggers the transition to the high probability state is entered. It becomes easy to enter the ball. Next, it is determined whether or not the probable accessory entry counter 203n is 0 (S4203). When it is determined that the probability variation winning ball entry counter 203n is 0 (S4203: Yes), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the “angle A1” (S4204), and the probability variation possibility determination end processing is completed. Return to the switch reading process. Note that when the process of S4204 is executed, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A2” state. Since the “angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704” is 300 degrees, the probability variation of the probability variation rotator 704 from the MPU 201 to the probability variation rotator motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variation rotator 704 in the process of S4204. The MPU 201 controls the probability variation rotator 704 by outputting a predetermined command for rotating the rotator motor 704 a at “speed of 600 degrees per second counterclockwise”. As a result, after 0.5 seconds from the process of S4204, the probability variation rotor 704 is in the “angle A1” state. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation 704 is in the “angle A1” state.

  In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the probability variation player entry counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4203: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated counterclockwise to the "angle A1" ( S4205). Next, 0 is set in the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4206), a value corresponding to the scheduled period of the probability variation determination is set in the probability variation period memory 203o (S4207), the probability variation determination determination end process is terminated, and the switch reading process Return to. In the present embodiment, 15000 (= 30 seconds ÷ (timer interrupt processing execution interval (2 milliseconds))) corresponding to the scheduled period of 30 seconds for the probability change possibility determination is set in the probability change period memory 203o.

  Here, the processing of S4205 to S4207 is not processing for ending the probability variation determination processing, but is processing for restarting the probability variation determination processing again according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703. . The processing of S4205 to S4207 is executed when there are a plurality of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. When there are a plurality of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703, the sphere is stopped in the path 703a below the probability variation occurrence switch 703, and therefore when the probability variation rotating body 704 is rotated counterclockwise to “angle A1” ( S4205), the sphere that has been stopped by the path 703a below the probability change generation switch 703 flows down to the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability change rotator 704. One second after execution of S4205 to S4207, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to start rotating clockwise by the probability variation determination process (see FIG. 45). Note that the process of S4205 is the same as the process of S4204.

<Variation processing>
With reference to FIG. 45, the fluctuation | variation process (S109) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 45 shows a variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

  This variation process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Then, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated, and a probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47) for checking whether or not the probability variation object 700 has failed during the jackpot game (determining whether or not the probability variation can be started) is also performed. Executed. The variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) and the variation process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 33) are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a probability change possibility determination process (see FIG. 47) is executed. It is.

  When the variation process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S701). When the jackpot is not being hit (S701: No), the processing after S702 is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if it is a big hit (S701: Yes), a probability change possible determination process (S4301) is executed, and this process is terminated. Note that the probability change possibility determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereby, only during the jackpot game, it is possible to execute the probability change possibility determination process for inspecting whether the probability variable actor 700 is out of order.

<Variation start processing>
With reference to FIG. 46, the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 shows a variation start process (S709) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment.

  Instead of the process (see S907 of FIG. 23) for turning on the probability change start scheduled flag 203m of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the fluctuation start process (FIG. 46) of the fourth embodiment is performed in S4401. The difference is that processing has been added. The process of S4401 is executed when it is determined that the jackpot lottery process of S901 is a big hit (S901: Yes), and when it is determined that the odd big hit is determined in the process of S906 (S906: Yes). In the processing of S4401, the probability change possibility determination flag 203s is turned on (S4401). As a result, when a ball enters the through switch 701 during the jackpot game, the electric tulip 702 opens. Therefore, based on the ball entering the probability change occurrence switch 703 inside the electric tulip 702, it is inspected whether the probability variable actor 700 is out of order during the jackpot game (determining whether or not probability change can be started). can do.

<Probability determination processing>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47, the probability change possibility determination process (S4301) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this probability change possibility determination processing (S4301). The probability change possibility determination process (S4301) is a process executed in the variation process (see FIG. 45) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and rotates the probability change rotator 704, This is a process of inspecting whether or not the probability variable object 700 has failed during the jackpot game (determining whether or not probability change can be started).

  The probability change possibility determination process (S4301) is executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), when the big hit is in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 45) (S701: Yes). Process.

  When the probability change possibility determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variable accessory entry counter 203n is 0 (S4501). If the probable player bonus entry counter 203n is 0 (S4501: Yes), this process is terminated. As a result, even if the probability change possibility determination process is executed when there is no sphere inside the probability variable actor 700 (between the probability change occurrence switch 703 and the probability change end switch 707), the processing of S4502 to S4507 is not executed. If it is determined that the probability variation winning ball entry counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4501: No), 1 is added to the probability variation period measurement counter 203p (S4502).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503). When it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not 500 or more (that is, less than 500) (S4503: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether the probability variation rotating body 704 is greater than or equal to "angle A2" (S4504).

  Here, the probability variable rotator 704 includes the state where the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variable rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap with each other, and further rotates clockwise from the “angle A2”. The state of the case. In the process of S4504, the current angle of the probability variable rotator motor 704a is acquired from the MPU 201 from the probability variable rotator motor 704a (motor driver) of the probability variable rotator 704, thereby determining whether the probability variable rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the "angle A2". .

  If it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is equal to or greater than the “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation rotator 704 is not greater than or equal to “angle A2” (ie, less than “angle A2”) (S4504: No), the probability variation rotator 704 is moved clockwise from the current angle to “angle AZ. ”(S4505).

  Here, the processing of S4501 to S4505 is processing executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), during the jackpot game, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 2 One is added every millisecond. In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is 500 or more. The value of 500 corresponds to 1 second. That is, after the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is set to 0, for one second, the processing (S4505) of rotating the probability variation rotor 704 clockwise from the current angle by “angle AZ” is not executed. During the jackpot game, the process of setting the probability variation period measurement counter 203p to 0 is two processes, a probability variation possibility determination start process (see FIG. 43) and a probability variation possibility determination end process (see FIG. 44). After the probability change possibility determination start process (see FIG. 43) is executed, that is, for one second after the probability change occurrence switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, the probability change rotator 704 stops at the “angle A1” state. ing. Further, after the probability change possibility determination end process (see FIG. 44), that is, when a plurality of balls have entered the probability change occurrence switch 703, when the probability change end switch 707 detects the arrival of one ball, If there is a sphere inside the probability variation object 700 (between the probability variation generation switch 703 and the probability variation end switch 707), the probability variation rotator 704 will rotate counterclockwise for 0.5 seconds from the detection of the entry. The rotation from the “angle A2” to the “angle A1” is performed, and the probability variation rotator 704 is stopped in the state of the “angle A1” for 0.5 seconds thereafter. As a result, the probability variation determination process can be executed again according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703.

  If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the probability variation rotator 704 is equal to or greater than “angle A2” (S4504: Yes), this process is terminated. The probability variation rotator 704 is in the state of “angle A2” when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other. Immediately after the probability variation rotator 704 is in the “angle A2” state, the ball of the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 is detected by the probability variation end switch 707. In this case, it is not necessary to further rotate the probability varying rotator 704 clockwise from the current angle “angle A2”. That is, since it is not necessary to execute the processing of S4505, this processing is finished. As a result, the probability variation rotator 704 maintains the state of “angle A2” until the probability variation end switch 707 detects the entry of a sphere.

  In addition, by the process of S4505, the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated by “angle AZ” clockwise from the current angle. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of rotation of the probability variation rotator 704 to the time when the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotator 704 and the ball discharge portion 706 overlap each other (scheduled period for determination of probability variation). 30 seconds. 15000 corresponding to 30 seconds is set in the probability variation period memory 203o. Since the process of S4505 is a process executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), “the angle AZ” is “the angle A1-A2 of the probability variation rotator 704”. / (Value of probability variation period memory 203o) ". In the present embodiment, the “angle AZ” is 0.02 (= 300/15000) degrees.

  When the processing of S4505 is executed, the probability variation period measurement counter 203p then determines whether or not the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is equal to or greater than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 in order to determine whether the estimated variation possibility determination period has been exceeded (S4506). ). If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is not equal to or greater than the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined that the probability variation period measurement counter 203p is greater than or equal to the sum of the probability variation period memories 203o and 1000 (S4506: Yes), a probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507), and this process is terminated. After setting the probability variation abnormality command, the display control device 114 receives the probability variation abnormality command via the sound lamp control device 113 (see S2810 in FIG. 31) and displays “probability variation abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2811 in FIG. 31).

<Operational effect of technical idea 7>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not start the probability change (probability change start processing (see FIG. 17)) even if the probability change occurrence switch 703 detects the ball entering during the big hit (S4001: Yes in FIG. 41). Is executed without executing the process (see FIG. 43). During the big hit game, the ball that enters the probability variation generation switch 703 and stops at the ball receiving portion 704b of the probability variation rotating body 704 is transferred to the probability variation end switch 707 (ball ejection portion 706) by a probability variation determination process (see FIG. 47). Lead. If it is determined by the main control device 110 that the estimated period has exceeded the scheduled period of the probability variation period determination from the probability variation period memory 203o and the probability variation period measurement counter 203p, a probability variation abnormality command is set (S4507 in FIG. 47). . The display control device 114 that has received the probability change abnormality command displays and notifies “probability change abnormality” on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, during the jackpot game, if the operation of the probability variable actor 700 (particularly, the probability variation rotating body motor 704a or the probability variation end switch 707) is normal, the notification indicating “probability variation abnormality” is not issued. Therefore, when the notification displayed as “probability change abnormality” is given, the player who has visually recognized the notification displayed as “probability change abnormality” or the store clerk of the game hall can change the probability change object 700 (in particular, the probability change rotating body motor 704a or the like). There is an effect that it is possible to know that the probability change end switch 707) is out of order.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment can have the same effect as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment based on the component same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st-3rd embodiment. .

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 53.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a small hit is set in addition to the win for the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and if a win is won during the probability change, a variation pattern at the time of a loss is selected by lottery. Therefore, a configuration for executing a process of switching a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table is added.

  In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the configurations of a part of the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. In addition, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), the start winning process (FIG. 20, S110), and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23, S709) executed by the MPU 201 are the timer interrupt process (FIG. 50) and the start winning process (FIG. 51, S110) and change start processing (FIG. 52, S709). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment, part of the configuration of the RAM 203 and R0M 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed with respect to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment, a transition number counter 203t is added to the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7A). About another structure, it is the same structure as 1st Embodiment.

  The transition number counter 203t is selected when a specific variation pattern table (outlier (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E) is selected for a variation pattern table that is out of order when winning a small hit in the probability variation state. This is a storage area in which the number of transitions set in the variation pattern table is set. When a specific variation pattern table is selected, when the variation display of special symbols is executed up to the number of transitions set for that variation pattern, the normal variation pattern table (outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table) is displayed. Is set.

  In this transition number counter 203t, the number of transitions set in the transition destination table set in S945 of the small hit process (S929, FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is set. In addition, by the process of S932 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 52, S709), every time the special symbol starts to fluctuate (a failure determination is not made), one is subtracted and updated.

  As described above, when winning a small hit, the variation pattern table in the case of losing by lottery is switched and set, but when the set number of transitions of the variation pattern table elapses, the variation pattern table is switched to the normal variation pattern table. Therefore, the player can play a game while predicting how many times the number of transitions is set. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the predetermined period (the period until the game ball is detected by the probability variation end switch) is in the probability variation gaming state, the variation pattern table selected when the small hit is won is extremely varied. A variation pattern with a short time is easily selected, and more lottery games can be performed during the probability change. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope that a variation pattern table in which a larger number of transitions is set will be selected.

  When the contents of the RAM 203 are initialized, the transition number counter 203t is initialized to 0, which is an initial value. On the other hand, when the power is turned off, the value of the transition number counter 203t is backed up. When the power is turned on again, the value is set back to the value when the power is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 (see FIG. 7 (b)) in the first embodiment in that the deviation variation pattern table 202g, the switching selection table 202h, Each winning random number table 202i is added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The deviation variation pattern table 202g is different in that deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E (see FIG. 49A) are added to the deviation variation pattern table 202d in the first embodiment. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are variation pattern tables that are selected by lottery when winning a small hit when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state). In addition, the out-of-bound (probable change) variation pattern table E is selected by lottery when the winning state is won when the gaming state is probabilistic and the out-of-progress (probability) variation pattern tables A to D are selected. It is a fluctuation pattern table.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the number of transitions is set in each of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E. The number of transitions is the normal (variable) variation that is the normal variation pattern table when the variation of the special symbol is executed up to the number set for the number of transitions when each variation pattern table is selected. Control is performed so as to forcibly shift to the pattern table (FIG. 9E).

  In the present embodiment, when the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if a winning hit is made, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is executed. It is comprised so that.

  Here, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E has a number of transitions of 500, which is set larger than the number of transitions of other variation pattern tables. In addition, this deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is a case where a small win is won (winning probability 28/900) when any of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D is set. Only when the value of the switching counter CK1 acquired in this case is 399 (selection probability 1/400), the variation pattern table is extremely difficult to select.

  However, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is set to 1/30, and 360 seconds is set as the minimum period of the high probability state. Therefore, the longest variation time of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is long. Even if all are selected, it is possible to change 72 special symbols, and in fact, more than that, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a lottery during a period of high probability. .

  As described above, when shifting to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D, it becomes easy for the player to select an extremely short variation pattern, and more lotteries can be executed in a short time. Expectation can be raised. Further, when the deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if a win is won, a lottery for determining whether to shift to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is executed. Can play a game in anticipation of the shift to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in a high probability state, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  Further, in this embodiment, when winning (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set, if winning a small hit, only a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an outlier (probability change) variation pattern table E is executed. Since the configuration is such that when a variation pattern table with a large number of transitions has been selected, a variation pattern table with a small number of transitions is selected, and a configuration in which the number of transitions is substantially reduced can be prevented. did. Further, when the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table E is selected, the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 5) is set so that even if the small win is won, the variation pattern table selected by the transfer lottery is not set. 49 (b)) is configured, it is possible to suppress the problem of shifting to another variation pattern table before the number of shifts reaches 0, although it is not a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E is set, when the big hit or the high probability gaming state ends, the number of transitions remains. Also, a variation pattern table corresponding to the next gaming state is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, if a big hit is made when the out (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E are set, the disengagement (probability variation) variation pattern table (FIG. 9) after the big hit game is in a high probability state. (E)), if it is a low probability gaming state, it has been configured so that a deviation (normal) variation pattern table is set, but not limited to that, when a higher probability gaming state is maintained after a jackpot game Alternatively, the set deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to E may be set as they are, and the game may be executed with the remaining number of transitions. With such a configuration, a gaming machine that is more advantageous to the player can be provided.

  As described above, the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49 (b)) changes the set variation pattern table to another variation pattern table when winning a small hit when the high probability gaming state is set. It is a selection table for determining whether to migrate. As shown in FIG. 49 (b), when winning a small hit, the selected variation pattern table is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (see FIG. 9 (e)), and a deviation variation pattern table. Separately from the case where A to D are selected, the value of the switching counter CK1 is set for the change pattern table at the transfer destination.

  When a winning (probable variation) variation pattern table (FIG. 9 (e)) is set, when winning a small hit, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are selected. Thus, each hit of the switching counter CK1 is assigned and set. When a value other than the set value of the switching counter CK1 is acquired, the change pattern table is not transferred. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern tables A to D are set with the number of times of transition (10 to 40 times). When any variation pattern table is selected, it is set to the selected variation pattern table. The number of times of transition is set in the transition number counter 203t.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), if any one of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D is set and the winning combination is won, the acquired switching counter CK1 is 399. The determination value of the switching counter CK1 is set so that the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table E is set.

  As described above, according to the switching selection table 202h (see FIG. 49B), the normal deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (FIG. 9E) in which the number of transitions is not set during the high-probability gaming state. ) Is set, a winning lottery to shift (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D, which is advantageous to the player by winning a small hit, is executed. You can play games with the expectation that you will win the jackpot during the state. Therefore, since it is possible to set a determination result that the player expects to win in addition to the jackpot, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, when any of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D is set, a winning (probability variation) that is more advantageous to the player than the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D is won. ) Since the lottery to determine whether or not to move to the variation pattern table E is executed based on the switching selection table 202h, the player can reduce the size even if the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern tables A to D are set. You can play games in the hope of winning.

  The small hit random number table 202i (see FIG. 49C) is a data table in which the value (determination value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be small hit is set for each gaming state. In the small hit random number table 202i, the small hit determination value is not set in the low probability state. As a result, in the low probability state, the player does not win a small win. Further, in the high probability state, a determination value of “0 to 27” is set as a winning determination value for small hits. Since this determination value is set to a value other than the determination value determined to be a big hit, the small hit determination value is set in the determination values determined to be out of place. Thereby, the small hit can be set without lowering the big hit probability in the high probability state.

  In addition, when winning a small hit, the symbol (341 in the present embodiment) indicating the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the LED is also lit on the first symbol display device 37 in a display mode indicating the small hit. The Thereafter, a small hit game is executed in which the specific winning opening 65a is executed for two rounds with an opening time of 3 seconds. Note that the gaming state after the small hitting game is maintained as the gaming state after the small hitting game (a low probability state is set when the high probability state ends after the small hitting winning).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53, the control processing in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the control process in the fifth embodiment, the timer interrupt control process, the variation start process, and the start winning process that are executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 50, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process (see FIG. 50) in the fifth embodiment is updated by adding 1 to the value of the switching counter CK1 in the process of S120, compared to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. Processing has been added. The switching counter CK1 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 299, and is a counter for determining whether or not to shift the variation pattern table when winning a small hit in a high probability state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the fluctuation start process (S709) which is one process in the fluctuation process (FIG. 21, S109) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S709).

  In the fluctuation start process (FIG. 51, S709), first, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a win (big hit) (S921). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (S921: Yes), settings necessary for the jackpot game are set (S922). Here, the setting required for the jackpot game is set such as the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the selected jackpot type, the maximum number of winnings per round to the specific winning opening 65a, the maximum time of one round, and the like. .

  The display mode at the time of jackpot (the display mode of the first symbol display device 37) is set (S923). It is determined whether the selected jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (S924). When it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit (S924: Yes), the probability variation start scheduled flag 203m is set to ON (S925). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit (S924: No), the process of S926 is executed.

  In the process of S926, based on the set fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S926). A stop type command is set (S927), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S921 that the result of the determination is wrong (S921: No), it is determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit (S928). When it is determined that a small hit is made (S928: Yes), a small hit process is executed (S929).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the small hit processing (S929) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this small hitting process (S929).

  It is determined whether the probability change flag 203l is on, that is, whether the probability change is in progress (high probability state) (S941). If it is determined that the probability changing flag 203l is on (S941: Yes), the variation pattern table is selected from the switching selection table 202h (FIG. 49C) based on the acquired value of the switching counter CK1. A lottery is executed (S942). Here, based on the currently set variation pattern table and the value of the switching counter CK1, a selection lottery is performed for the destination variation pattern table from the switching selection table 202h. When the lottery has acquired the value of the switching counter CK1 in which the change pattern table of the transfer destination is not set, the change of the change pattern table is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the change pattern table of the transfer destination is determined by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to shift to a predetermined change pattern table when winning a small hit. May be.

  In the process of S943, it is determined whether or not the migration of the variation pattern table is determined in the process of S942. If it is determined that the migration of the variation pattern table is determined (S943: Yes), the variation pattern table of the determined migration destination is set (S944). The number of transitions set in the set variation pattern table is set in the transition number counter 203t (S945). A small hit game is set (S946). As for the setting of the small hit game, the number of rounds (in this embodiment, 2 rounds), the maximum number of winnings to a specific winning opening (in this embodiment, 10), the maximum time of one round (in this embodiment, 3) Second) is set. The display mode at the time of small hit (the lighting mode of the LED displayed on the first symbol display device 37) is set (S947).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S941 that the probability change flag 203l is OFF (S941: No), or in the processing of S943, it is determined that the table migration is not determined (S943: No), S946. , S947 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the start winning process (FIG. 53, S110) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S604 is changed to S620 and the process of S608 is changed to S630, respectively, with respect to the start winning process (FIG. 20, S110) in the first embodiment. ing.

  In the processes of S620 and S630, a process of acquiring the switching counter CK1 and storing it in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is added to the processes of S604 and S608, respectively. ing. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine by lottery whether to switch the variation pattern table based on the fact that the winning is a small hit, but not limited thereto, every time a special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. In addition, a lottery for switching the variation pattern table may be executed, or the variation pattern table may be switched in a predetermined order.

  For example, a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected is set up to a predetermined number of times after the high probability gaming state is set, and then a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected. You may set to switch to. By setting in this way, a lot of special symbol lottery is executed, and in the state where the high probability state is remaining, a variation mode with a high expectation to the jackpot which is a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time. I can enjoy it.

  Conversely, a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected is set up to a predetermined number of times after the high probability gaming state is set, and then a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected. You may set so that it may switch to a fluctuation pattern table. By configuring in this way, even when the remaining period of the high probability state is reduced, more special symbols can be drawn, and the player can continue to expect the jackpot longer. .

<Correspondence between description of embodiment and description of claims>
The “first entrance switch or the second entrance switch” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “detecting means” described in the claims. The “first symbol or third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” described in the claims. The “big hit” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “special game state” described in the claims. “Various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach” described in the embodiment correspond to “first dynamic display” described in the claims. “Short out, short out” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “second dynamic display” described in the claims. The “large probability of low probability state” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first probability” described in the claims. The “high probability state jackpot probability” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second probability” described in the claims.

<Modification>
Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

  For example, in the first embodiment described above, the time until the probability changing rotator 704 changes from the “angle A1” state to the “angle A2” state (a period that is one second less than the “maximum probability change period”) is 360 seconds. Although the case has been described, it may be longer or shorter than 360 seconds (for example, 100 seconds, 600 seconds, etc.). In addition, the time until the probability varying rotator 704 is changed from the “angle A1” state to the “angle A2” state is set to a fixed value of 360 seconds, and this time is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2. It may be configured. For example, 100 seconds may be associated with the value “0-24” of the first type counter C2, or 600 seconds may be associated with the value “50-99” of the first type counter C2. May be attached. In this case, when the probability variation occurrence switch 703 detects the entry of a sphere, when the transition to the high probability state is made, the probability variation rotator 704 indicates “angle A1” according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time. The time until the state of “angle A2” is reached from the state is determined. Thereby, the player can be rejoiced according to the length of the probability change period determined at the start of the probability change. Therefore, the range of game play given to the player can be expanded.

  Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, in the probability variation period progress processing (see FIG. 22), the probability variation rotator 704 is rotated clockwise (the same every time) every 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing. However, it is not necessary to rotate the probability variable rotator 704 every time the timer interrupt process is executed, and the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times (twice, (3 times, etc.) The probability variation rotator 704 may be rotated each time it is executed. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced rather than rotating the probability varying rotator 704 each time the timer interruption process is performed on the probability varying rotator 704.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the probability variable object 700 having the probability variable rotator 704 has been described as a character for displaying the remaining time of the probability change. The remaining time may be displayed. For example, the probability variable 700 is a blocking member that blocks a ball that has been detected by the probability change occurrence switch 703, which is a trigger for the probability change, from entering the probability change end switch 707, which is a trigger for the probability change. Also good. The ball may remain in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member may be opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., elapse of a predetermined time) and guided to the probability change end switch 707.

  Further, for example, the probability variation object 700 may be configured by a slope on which a sphere rolls, and a probability variation end switch 707 may be provided at a point where the ball that has entered the probability variation generation switch 703 flows down the slope. In the probability variation object 700, a period until a ball that has entered the probability variation occurrence switch 703 is guided to the probability variation end switch 707 (a period that is one second less than the “maximum probability variation period”) depends on the number of variation effects. Instead, any configuration may be used as long as the certainty change ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of certainty change.

  Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, the probability variable accessory 700 having the probability variable rotator 704 is described as a character for displaying the remaining time of probability variation, but the character itself does not display the remaining time of probability variation. Alternatively, the accessory itself may not be visible to the player, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time of probability change. When displaying the remaining time of probability variation on the third symbol display device 81, for example, when probability variation is started in the probability variation start process (see FIG. 17), a probability variation start command indicating that probability variation is started is The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the display control device 114. This probability change start command includes information on “the maximum probability change period”. The display control device 114 that has received the probability change start command displays the remaining time of probability change in the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the “probability change longest period” of the probability change start command and the elapsed time from when the probability change start command is received. What is necessary is just to display. Thereby, the player can recognize the decrease in the remaining time of probability change.

  Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, when “15R normal jackpot” is won, the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds, for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), In this case, the probability variable object 700 may be configured to be in a short time state for a predetermined time. As a result, not only the probability variation period but also the time reduction period, the time reduction state can be terminated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the time reduction state.

  In the first to fifth embodiments, the “variable maximum variation period” is configured to be doubled or tripled according to the number of balls that have entered the probability variation generation switch 703. The processing according to the number of balls that have entered the ball 703 is not limited to this. When there are two or more balls that have entered the probability change generation switch 703, for example, before the probability change is started, Two or more spheres may be discharged from the sphere discharge unit 706 so that there is only one sphere inside the object 700. Specifically, the probability variation rotator 704 reciprocates between the state of “angle A1” and the state of “angle A2” until the probability variation object entering ball counter 203n becomes 1 during the one second. The rotating body motor 704a is configured to be controlled. In addition, the electric tulip 702 may be provided with a structure in which the number of balls entering the probability change generation switch 703 is always one. Specifically, a member that can take a state in which the passage of the sphere on the path 703a is permitted and a state in which the passage of the sphere on the path 703a is blocked are provided immediately above the probability change generation switch 703. In a state where the passage of the ball on the path 703a is blocked, a path for guiding the ball that has been blocked to the ball discharge path (not shown) of the gaming machine 10 is provided. When a ball entering the probability change occurrence switch 703 is detected, the MPU 201 is configured to change from a state in which the passage of the sphere on the route 703a is permitted to a state in which the passage of the sphere on the route 703a is blocked for 10 seconds.

  In the first to fifth embodiments, the probability variation rotator 704 is configured to rotate by a predetermined angle (by a predetermined angle every predetermined period). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it rotates smoothly at a predetermined speed. It may be configured. Thus, by comprising, it can alert | report to a player that it is easy to understand that the remaining period of a probability change period is reducing.

  Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, if the probability variation rotator 704 does not rotate more than a predetermined angle even after the probability variation period has exceeded a predetermined period (set maximum period), an injustice or a malfunction occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the probability variation rotator 704 is controlled when the probability variation rotator 704 is controlled to rotate. When the angle is discriminated and a deviation occurs between the control and the actual angle (position), the notification mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an alarm is sounded, a signal is output to the hall computer, etc. May be executed. Further, as the improper processing, the high probability state may be shifted to the normal probability state. Moreover, it may be configured to temporarily shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state and to restore the high probability state when the power is turned on again by the store clerk. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even when the probability variation rotator 740 is engaged in the structure and stops rotating or when the game ball is caught.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, Display data table is prepared for each element such as “Fluctuation start-up”, “High-speed fluctuation”, “Notice effect”, “Normal reach”, “Super reach”, and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may make it do. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements as described above and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame on which a drawn image is to be developed. Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered from “0” to “9”. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Even if all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed. Good.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that a command instructing the output of each audio and lighting of the lamp is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag. Then, the display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, the audio data is read from the audio data storage area 222a and reproduced audio. The data storage area 223d may be set.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the winning at the first entrance 64, the winning at the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are the maximum. Although it is configured to be held up to 4 times, the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . In addition, in some parts of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the second entrance 640 are: You may make it display with the mode (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only the number of reservation balls by the number or the area divided into four, and is separate from 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. In this case, a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Naturally, some or all of the embodiments and modifications described above may be combined.

<Concepts of various inventions>
The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Notify the period when the game ball moves to the end switch during the probability variation period)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform determination, the display unit for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display unit The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the success / failure determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state that is set to be higher than a predetermined probability that is a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set A setting condition determining means for determining whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. Te, the gaming machine wherein the in which ordinary and a state switching setting means for setting a state A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the determination is performed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A special state is set by the state setting means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit / non-necessity determination means is determined to be higher than the predetermined probability in the normal state is set. The setting condition determining means determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state is set. Based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means, the normal state is set by the state switching setting means. Thereby, after the predetermined period has elapsed after the privilege game state has been set by the state setting means, when the setting condition is satisfied, the normal state is switched, so that the special state can be set at least for the predetermined period. it can. Therefore, the player can enjoy at least the special state for a predetermined period. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detecting means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means Moving means for moving from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and second detection for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving means And the state setting means sets the special state based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means includes the second condition determining means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that, based on the detection of a game ball by a detecting means, it is determined that the set condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held at the first position by the holding means. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. A special state is set by the first detection means based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means, it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determination means. Therefore, the period from the holding by the holding means to the detection by the second detecting means becomes a period during which the special state is set, and there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine A2, a detection number storage means for storing the number of game balls detected by the first detection means, and a game ball detected by the second detection means based on the number stored in the detection number storage means Updating means for subtracting and updating based on the state, and the state switching setting means detects a game ball by the second detecting means, and the number stored in the detected number storage means by the updating means. When it is updated to 0, the gaming machine A3 is switched to the special state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls detected by the first detection means is stored by the detection number storage means. The number stored in the detected number storage means is subtracted based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting means and updated by the updating means. When the game ball is detected by the second detecting means and the number stored in the detected number storage means is updated to 0 by the updating means, the state switching setting means switches to the special state. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are detected by the first detection means, it is possible to set a longer period during which the special state is set, and allow the player to detect a large number of game balls. A game can be performed in anticipation of Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3, the gaming machine A3 includes a entrance where a game ball can enter, and a guidance unit that guides the game ball that has entered the entrance to the holding unit, and the first detection unit includes the entrance The holding means has a holding portion capable of holding one game ball, and when the game ball is held in the holding portion, the holding means detects the game ball that has entered the ball opening. When a game ball enters a ball opening, the game machine A4 is stored in the guide unit until the game ball that has been inserted is held in the holding unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball that has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter is guided to the holding unit by the guide unit. A game ball that has entered the entrance is detected by the first detection means. When a game ball is held by the holding unit of the holding means and the game ball is held by the holding unit, when the game ball enters the entrance, the entered game ball is held by the holding unit. Until it is done, it is stored by the guiding part. Thereby, the game balls detected by the first detection means can be sequentially guided to the holding unit. Therefore, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball detected by the first detection means to the holding unit, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that impairs the profit of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the dynamic display time determining means determines one dynamic display time from the dynamic display time group set by a plurality of dynamic display times as a result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means The game machine A5 is characterized in that it is easy to determine a long dynamic display time when it is determined that the determination result is a determination result indicated by the specific identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. In other words, one dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determination unit based on the result of the determination of the correctness determination unit from the group of dynamic display times set in the plurality of dynamic display times. When it is determined that the determination result is a determination result indicated by specific identification information, a long dynamic display time is easily determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. Thereby, when the identification information is dynamically displayed in a long dynamic display time, it is possible to cause the player to expect specific identification information to be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display time, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

<Characteristic B group> (Rotating accessory is rotated only during the fluctuation period of symbols)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not it is correct, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display unit A dynamic display time determining means for determining a display time; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means; and the success / failure determining means. And a state setting means for setting a special state that is set to be higher than a predetermined probability of being in a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition. A setting for determining whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means after the state is set A gaming machine B1 comprising: a case determination means; and a state switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determination means. .

  According to the gaming machine B1, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit determination unit determines that the hit is higher than the predetermined probability of the normal state. The setting condition discriminating unit determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special state is set by the state setting unit and then the total time for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display unit has elapsed. The Based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means, the normal state is set by the state switching setting means. Thus, after the identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined time, it is set by switching from the special state to the normal state, so that the special state setting can be maintained while the player does not play the game. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's profit is impaired while the player does not play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her profits and motivated to be bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means A moving means for moving the first holding position from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and the moving means moves the game ball while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Movement control means for controlling, and second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, wherein the state setting means is the first detection The special state is set based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the means, and the setting condition determining means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Is determined to have been established Gaming machine B2, wherein those.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. While the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, the movement control means controls the movement means to move the game ball. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means, it is determined by the setting condition determination means that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, a special state can be set in the period when a game ball is moved. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine B2, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition unit that acquires the determination information determined by the determination unit and the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit are suspended until the determination condition is satisfied. Storage means that can be stored as information, the movement control means, when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, when the hold information is stored in the storage means, The gaming machine B3 is controlled so as to continue the movement of the game ball by the moving means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination information that is determined to be correct by the correctness determination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The determination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored as hold information until a determination condition is satisfied by the storage unit. When the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, if the holding information is stored in the storage unit, the movement control unit controls the movement of the game ball by the moving unit. Therefore, when the hold information is stored, the movement control means is controlled so that the movement of the game ball is continued, so there is no need to stop the movement means and the control process is simplified. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the moving means moves the gaming ball at a constant speed from the first position to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the game ball is moved by the moving means from the first position to the second position at a constant speed, so that the special state is set at a certain time. There is an effect that it can be easily controlled.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the moving means moves a predetermined moving amount at predetermined intervals from the first position to the second position. .

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the moving means is moved from the first position to the second position by a moving means with a predetermined moving amount every predetermined period. There is an effect that the state can be easily controlled at a certain time.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the success / failure determination unit executes the determination of success / failure based on a probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state that is set when the determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B6, whether or not the determination is correct is made based on the effect corresponding to any of the gaming machines B1 to B5 and the probability corresponding to the normal state or the special state set when the determination condition is satisfied. Since it is executed by the means, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by allowing the game to be played with the expectation that the determination condition is satisfied during the period of the special state.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, after the special state is set, the dynamic display time is stored on the display means based on the start of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine B7 having time storage means, wherein the movement control means controls the movement means in accordance with the total time stored in the time storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, after the special state is set, based on the start of dynamic display of identification information on the display means, the total time of the dynamic display time is stored in the time storage means. The movement means is controlled by the movement control means in accordance with the total time stored in the time storage means.

  Thereby, when the identification information is dynamically displayed, the moving means can be configured to move the game ball. Therefore, even if the player takes a break during the special state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage.

  In the gaming machine B7, based on whether the special state is set by the state switching setting unit or the normal state is set, the value stored in the time storage unit is set to an initial value. A gaming machine B8 having an initializing means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the special state is set by the state switching setting unit, or the normal state is set, and is stored in the time storage unit. Since the value is set to the initial value by the initialization unit, there is an effect that the control by the movement control unit can be easily performed when the special state is set.

<Characteristic C group> (Countermeasures against fraud, abnormal notification if the change does not end after a predetermined period of time)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform determination, the display unit for displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display unit The dynamic display time determining means for determining the time, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means, and the success / failure determining means. In a gaming machine having state setting means for setting a special state that is set to be higher than a predetermined probability that is a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set A setting condition determining means for determining whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. The state switching setting means for setting the normal state, the period determining means for determining the period set in the special state based on the setting of the special state, and the predetermined period by the period determining means A gaming machine C1 having an abnormality processing means for determining that an abnormal condition is satisfied when a period equal to or longer than the period has elapsed and executing a predetermined abnormality process.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the determination is performed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state in which the probability determined to be a hit by the determination unit is higher than a predetermined probability in the normal state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The setting condition determining means determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special state is set. The normal state is set based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means. Based on the setting of the special state, the period set in the special state is determined by the period determination unit. When the period determination means determines that an abnormal condition has been satisfied when a period of a predetermined period or more has elapsed, a predetermined abnormality process is executed by the abnormality processing means. Thereby, it can suppress that a special state is set over an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that impair the profit of the amusement store.

  In the gaming machine C1, the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormality processing, the special state is illegally changed by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state. There is an effect that the trouble that the state continues can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at the first position, and a game held by the holding means A moving means for moving the ball from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means; and a first detecting means for detecting the moved game ball after the ball is moved to the second position by the moving means. 2, and the state setting means sets the special state based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that it is determined that the set condition is satisfied based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the second detection means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, the special state is set by the state setting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the setting condition determination means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the period during which the game ball moves can be set as the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C3 further includes a movement amount determination unit that determines whether the period determined by the period determination unit and the movement amount moved by the movement unit are within a normal value. The gaming machine C4, wherein the predetermined abnormality process is executed based on the determination that the amount is outside the normal value by the amount determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the moving amount determining means determines whether the period determined by the period determining means and the moving amount moved by the moving means are within normal values. Based on the determination result that the value is outside the normal value, a predetermined abnormality process is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that an abnormality can be determined at an early stage.

<Feature D group> (Anti-fraud (movable only during dynamic display))
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not it is correct, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic of the identification information displayed on the display unit A dynamic display time determining means for determining a display time; a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means; and the success / failure determining means. And a state setting means for setting a special state that is set to be higher than a predetermined probability of being in a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition. A setting for determining whether or not a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after the total time for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display means after the state is set A state switching setting unit for setting the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition is determined to be satisfied by the case determining unit, the setting condition determining unit, and the identification information after the special state is set. When it is determined by the time determination means that the total time of the dynamic display time in the special state has elapsed, and the time determination means determines that a time equal to or more than a predetermined time has elapsed based on the start of dynamic display The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having an abnormality processing means for determining that an abnormal condition is established and executing a predetermined abnormality process.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit determination unit determines that the hit is higher than the predetermined probability of the normal state. The setting condition discriminating unit determines whether a setting condition that is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special state is set by the state setting unit and then the total time for which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display unit has elapsed. The Based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means, the normal state is set by the state switching setting means. After the special state is set, the total time of the dynamic display time in the special state is determined by the time determining unit based on the fact that the identification information is dynamically displayed. When it is determined by the time determination means that a time equal to or longer than the predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal condition is satisfied, and the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Thereby, it can suppress that a special state is set over an excessively long period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress problems that impair the profit of the amusement store.

  In the gaming machine D1, the abnormality processing means sets the normal state as the predetermined abnormality processing, the gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the normal state is set by the abnormality processing means as the predetermined abnormality processing. Therefore, the special state is illegally performed by forcibly switching from the special state to the normal state. There is an effect that the trouble that the state continues can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game held by the holding means A moving means for moving the ball while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position, and a game ball is moved by the moving means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The movement control means for controlling the movement means, and the second detection means for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the movement means, and the state setting means The special state is set based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means is based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection means. And said Gaming machine D3 which characterized in that to determine the constant condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, the movement means is controlled by the movement control means so that the game ball is moved by the movement means. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, the special state is set by the state setting means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the setting condition determination means determines that the setting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the period during which the game ball moves can be set as the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D3 includes a moving amount determining unit that determines whether the total time determined by the time determining unit and the moving amount moved by the moving unit are within a normal value, and the abnormality processing unit includes: The gaming machine D4, wherein the predetermined abnormality process is executed based on the determination that the movement amount determination means is outside the normal value.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movement amount determination means determines whether the total time determined by the time determination means and the movement amount moved by the movement means are within normal values. Based on the determination that the determination result is out of the normal value, the predetermined abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means. Therefore, there is an effect that an abnormality can be determined at an early stage.

<Characteristic E group> (Change table of change time by small hit)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, whether or not the determination is made, the display for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display Dynamic display time determining means for determining time, storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display time groups composed of a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and storage thereof Group type changing means for changing the dynamic display time group in which the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means based on the establishment of the change condition from among the dynamic display time groups stored in the means And when the specific identification information is displayed on the display means, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player, and the probability that the winning determination means is determined to be a hit is in a normal state. Place And a state setting unit that sets a special state that is set higher than the probability of a predetermined condition based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, after the special state is set by the state setting unit, It is determined that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means for determining whether the setting condition is satisfied after the total time of the dynamic display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the setting condition determining means On the basis of this, the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means has a dynamic display time shorter than other dynamic display time groups. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a short dynamic display time group that is easily set is set.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the determination is performed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. Identification information indicating the determination result is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A plurality of dynamic display time groups constituted by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determination means are stored in the storage means. The dynamic display time group determined by the dynamic display time determining means is changed by the group type changing means based on the establishment of the change condition from among the dynamic display time groups stored in the storage means. Is done. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit determination unit determines that the hit is higher than the predetermined probability of the normal state. After the special state is set by the state setting means, the setting condition determining means determines whether the setting condition is satisfied after the total time of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means has elapsed for a predetermined time. Based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means, the normal state is set by the state switching setting means. A short dynamic display time group that is easier to determine a dynamic display time than other dynamic display time groups is set in the dynamic display time group stored in the storage unit. Thereby, by setting the short dynamic display time group, the identification information can be dynamically displayed many times during the special state, and the game can be performed efficiently. Therefore, in a special state, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, a first detection means capable of detecting a game ball, a holding means capable of holding the game ball detected by the first detection means at a first position, and a game ball held by the holding means Moving means for moving from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and second detection for detecting the moved game ball after being moved to the second position by the moving means And the state setting means sets the special state based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means, and the setting condition determination means includes the second condition determining means. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied based on detection of a game ball by a detecting means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means. Thereby, the period during which the game ball moves can be set as the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the group type changing means is configured to be able to select the short dynamic display time group when the changing condition is satisfied when the special state is set. Characteristic gaming machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the special state is set, the short dynamic display time group is selected when the change condition is established by the group type changing means. It is possible to increase the number of identification information to be dynamically displayed during the period in which the state is set, and there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the special state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is set to be more easily selected by the group type changing means in the special state than in the normal state. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the short dynamic display time group is selected by the group type changing means in the special state rather than in the normal state. Since it is set easily, there is an effect that when the special state is set, the player can expect the player to select the short dynamic display time group and play the game.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the group type changing means is predetermined based on the fact that the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after changing to the short dynamic display time group. A gaming machine E5 that is changed to another dynamic display time group.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, it is predetermined based on the fact that the identification information is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times after changing to the short dynamic display time group. Since it is changed by the group type changing means to the other displayed dynamic display time group, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the short dynamic display time from being excessively selected.

<Feature F group> (Deformation M)
A detection means for detecting the entry of a game ball into a specific area, and whether or not to make a transition to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the entry of the game ball by the detection means. And a control means for performing control based on the lottery result, a dynamic display determining means for determining the dynamic display of the identification information based on the lottery result of the lottery by the control means, and the dynamic display determining means. And a dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in a period corresponding to the dynamic display, and the probability that the special game state is won in the lottery when a game ball enters Starting area detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered a high probability start area that triggers a second probability higher than the first probability, and a game ball in the high probability start area by the start area detecting means Entered the ball A high probability starting means having the second probability as the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery, and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means. A high-probability ending unit that sets the first probability as the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery after a predetermined period from the second probability, and the dynamic display determining unit The dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means determines at least the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the period of execution of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is The first dynamic display has a longer period than the second dynamic display, and the first dynamic display is executed in the dynamic display execution means more than when the second dynamic display is executed. If you are Gaming machine F1, wherein said that those likely to win a special game state in selection.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the control means draws a lottery whether or not to change to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the detection means detecting that the game ball has entered the specific area. Based on the result of the lottery, the dynamic display determination means determines the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means moves the identification information in a period corresponding to the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display determination means. Perform static display. The high probability start means sets the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery when the start area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high probability start area as the second probability (set to the high probability state) ). On the other hand, the high probability end means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery after a predetermined period after the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means as the first probability. (Exit high probability state). The dynamic display determination means determines at least the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display as the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. The first dynamic display has a longer period of execution of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means than the second dynamic display, and it is more likely that the special game state is won in the lottery. Accordingly, the high probability end means sets the probability that the special game state is won in the lottery after a predetermined period after the probability that the special game state is won in the lottery by the high probability start means is the first probability. Therefore, even when the first dynamic display with a long dynamic display execution period is highly likely due to the dynamic display period being highly likely to be won in the special gaming state in the lottery The period of the probability state does not increase. For example, when there is a high probability state, there is a high possibility that the special game state is won in the lottery without making a transition to the special game state, and the dynamic display is performed multiple times with a long dynamic display period. If the period of the high probability state is simply increased, the game becomes monotonous, which may cause discomfort to the player. According to the present invention, since the period of the high probability state does not increase due to the period of the dynamic display, the discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state can be reduced. . If the first dynamic display that is highly likely to win the special gaming state in the lottery is not executed, and the second dynamic display that is unlikely to win the special gaming state is executed in the lottery, the second dynamic display is executed. Since the period during which the dynamic display is executed is shorter than the first dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is less reduced than when the first dynamic display is executed. Therefore, the opportunity of the lottery which can change to a special game state more remains. On the other hand, if the first dynamic display that is highly likely to win the special gaming state in the lottery is executed and the second dynamic display that is unlikely to win the special gaming state is not executed in the lottery, the first dynamic display is executed. Since the period in which the display is executed is longer than that in the second dynamic display, the remaining period until the high probability state ends is much smaller than that in the case where the second dynamic display is executed. Therefore, if it is not determined that the transition to the special gaming state is caused by the dynamic variation, the chances of lottery that can transition to the special gaming state are reduced. As a result, in the dynamic display, the desire that the player wants to decide to transition to the special gaming state inevitably increases. That is, the enthusiasm for the dynamic display increases to the climax. Accordingly, the degree of reduction of the lottery opportunity that can make a transition to the special gaming state differs according to the dynamic display executed in the high probability state, so that it is possible to provide a new gameability to the player. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine F1, when a game ball enters, the end of detecting that the game ball has entered the high probability end region that has the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery as the first probability A game ball that has entered the high-probability start area after a predetermined period after the probability that the special gaming state is won in the lottery is determined as the second probability by the area detection means and the high-probability start means. Ball guiding means for guiding to a high probability end area, the high probability end means in the lottery when the end area detection means detects that a game ball has entered the high probability end area The gaming machine F2 is configured so that the probability of winning the special gaming state is the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. The high probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability when the ending area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high probability ending area. The ball guiding means guides the game ball entered the high probability start area to the high probability end area after a predetermined period after the probability that the special game state is won in the lottery by the high probability start means is set as the second probability. . Thereby, the player can predict the end of the high probability state from the movement of the ball guided by the ball guiding means. Note that the ball guiding means described in the gaming machine F2 is not limited to a mode in which the game ball that has entered the high probability start region is guided to the high probability end region, and the game ball is brought close to the high probability end region. For example, the ball guiding means is a blocking member that blocks the route to the high probability end region, and the gaming ball is allowed to stay in front of the blocking member, and the blocking member is opened when a predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the high probability It may be a mode leading to the end region. In addition, the ball guiding means may be a slope, and a game ball that has entered the high probability start area may have a high probability end area before flowing down the slope. The period from when the ball guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the high probability start area to the high probability end area, after the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery by the high probability start means is the second probability, It does not have to be related to the number of dynamic displays determined by the automatic display determination means.

  In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means sets the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability ending means after the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is set as the second probability by the high probability starting means. In the first period until the probability of winning in the first period is regarded as the first probability, if the transition to the special gaming state is not made in the first period, the high probability starting means wins the special gaming state in the lottery. A gaming machine having a configuration in which a game ball that has entered the high probability start area is guided to the high probability end area so that a predetermined period is set when the second probability is the second probability F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. The ball guiding means has a second probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means until a probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability ending means until the first probability. The first period is configured to guide the game ball that has entered the high probability start area to the high probability end area so as to be a predetermined period when the special game state is not changed in the first period. Thereby, regardless of the length of the period during which the dynamic display is executed, the period of the high probability state when the transition to the special gaming state is not made can be made constant. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further reduce discomfort given to the player by simply increasing the period of the high probability state.

  In the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means includes a first stopping means for stopping a game ball that has entered the high probability start area, and a game ball stopped by the first stopping means. A game machine F4, comprising: first movement execution means for moving the automatic display execution means to lead to the high probability end region during a period in which the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. The ball guiding means includes a first stopping means for stopping the game ball that has entered the high-probability start area, and a game ball stopped by the first stopping means, wherein the dynamic display executing means displays the identification information dynamically. And a first movement execution means for moving to lead to the high probability end region during the execution period. Thus, unless the game ball enters the specific area, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is not executed, so that the game ball stopped by the first stop means approaches the high probability end area. Absent.

  For example, due to factors such as a failure of a ball launcher that launches a game ball onto the game board, a game ball clogged with a nail on the game board, or a nail on the game board being tightened to a specific area, etc. There may be cases where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. In these cases, if the game ball stopped by the first stop means approaches the high probability end region, the lottery opportunities in the high probability state decrease, so that the player's profit cannot be secured. According to the present invention, unless the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball stopped by the first stopping means does not approach the high probability end area, and the chance of lottery in the high probability state does not decrease. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit of the player can be protected.

  In the gaming machine F2, the ball guiding means guides the game ball stopped by the second stopping means to the high probability end area, the second stopping means for stopping the game ball entering the high probability start area. As described above, when the dynamic display determination unit determines the dynamic display of the identification information, the movement amount corresponding to the period of the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display determination unit, the second movement execution unit to move A gaming machine F5, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. The ball guiding means is a second stop means for stopping the game ball that has entered the high probability start area, and a dynamic display determining means for guiding the game ball stopped by the second stop means to the high probability end area. A moving amount corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the second moving execution means for moving the second moving movement means. As a result, the player who knows the amount of movement of the game ball stopped at the second stop means corresponding to the period of the dynamic display shows how much the game ball is in the high probability end area when the dynamic display is visually confirmed. It can be judged whether it approaches. That is, the end of the high probability state can be predicted from the dynamic display.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is set as the second probability by the high probability starting means, and the special gaming state is set in the lottery by the high probability ending means. First period storage means for storing a value representing a period until the probability of winning is the first probability, and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery by the high probability starting means is the second probability. It is determined that the elapsed period has been exceeded from the first progress storage means for storing a value representing the elapsed time since the start, the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first period storage means The first excess determination means and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery based on the fact that the elapsed period is determined to be exceeded by the first excess determination means Gaming machine F6, characterized in that it comprises a high probability abort means probability, the.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are produced. For example, a game ball that has entered the high probability start area has reached the high probability end area due to a fraudulent act such as failure or destruction of the ball guide means or blocking of the game ball by the guide means. If this is not possible, the high-probability state will not end unless the game ball reaches the high-probability end region, so the high-probability state can be illegally extended. However, according to the present invention, after the first excess determination means determines the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery from the value of the first progress storage means and the value of the first period storage means as the second probability. If it is determined that the elapsed period of time is exceeded, the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is set as the first probability by the high probability forced termination means, so that it is possible to prevent the high probability state from being illegally extended. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined gaming state before setting the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the second probability is determined by the determination unit. When it is determined that the game state is in effect, even if it is detected by the start area detection means that a game ball has entered the high probability start area, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is determined. A high probability non-starting means that does not have a second probability, and the start area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high probability starting area, and the special gaming state in the lottery is detected by the high probability non-starting means. If the probability of winning is not the second probability, the third stopping means for stopping the game ball that has entered the high probability start area, and the game ball stopped by the third stopping means The third movement execution means for moving the guide ball to the high probability end area and the start area detection means detect that the game ball has entered the high probability start area, and then the game ball is Second period storage means for storing a value representing a scheduled period of time until movement of the game ball is detected in the high probability end area by the end area detection means after being moved by the movement execution means; and the start area detection A second progress storage means for storing a value representing an elapsed time since it was detected by the means that a game ball entered the high probability start area, a value of the second progress storage means and the second period storage A second excess determining means for determining from the value of the means that the elapsed period has exceeded the scheduled period, and the second excess determining means has determined that the elapsed period has exceeded the scheduled period Based on that Gaming machine F7 to the informing means for informing of comprising: a.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the following effects are produced. When it is determined by the determining means that the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is a predetermined gaming state before the second probability, the high probability non-starting means Even if it is detected that a game ball has entered, the probability of winning the special game state in the lottery is not set as the second probability. In the case of this predetermined game state, the game ball that has entered the high probability start area and is stopped by the third stop means is guided to the high probability end area by the third movement execution means. When it is determined by the second excess determination means that the scheduled period exceeds the elapsed period from the second period storage means and the second progress storage means, a predetermined notification is made by the notification means. Thereby, in a predetermined gaming state, if the ball guiding means and the end area detecting means are normal, the predetermined notification is not made. Therefore, when the predetermined notification is made, there is an effect that the player who has visually recognized the predetermined notification or the store clerk of the game hall can know that the ball guiding means or the end area detecting means is out of order.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, whether or not the dynamic display executing means is executing dynamic display based on the fact that the end area detecting means detects that a game ball has entered the high probability end area The dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not the dynamic display execution determining means determines that the dynamic display executing means is executing the dynamic display, and the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery A first probability, a high-probability ending schedule unit that schedules the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery as the first probability, and the high-probability ending unit includes the high probability When it is scheduled that the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is set as the first probability by the probability ending schedule unit, after the dynamic display executing unit stops the dynamic display, in the lottery Gaming machine F8, characterized in that it is configured so that the probability of winning serial to special game state and the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are produced. For example, when a game ball that has entered a high-probability start area is guided by the ball guide means and is entered into the high-probability end area immediately before the stop of dynamic display, the player There is a possibility of being confused whether the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the first probability or the second probability. According to the present invention, the high probability end scheduling means determines that the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution determination means, and sets the probability that the special game state is won in the lottery as the first probability. In this case, the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is scheduled to be the first probability. When this schedule is made, the high-probability ending means sets the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery after the dynamic display executing means stops the dynamic display as the first probability, so the above-mentioned player is confused. Even in situations where there is a risk, there is an effect that the player is not confused.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, third progress storage means for storing a value representing an elapsed period of a period in which the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the second probability, and the special in the lottery When it is determined that a transition to the special gaming state is made in the lottery while the probability of winning the gaming state is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means, the more valuable the player is given. A gaming machine F9, comprising valuable value amount determining means for determining a large amount of value.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the following effects are produced. When the value of the valuable value determination means determines to transition to the special gaming state in the lottery while the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the second probability, the smaller the value of the third progress storage means, A large amount of valuable value to be given to the player is determined. That is, the earlier the elapsed period from the start of the high probability state, the greater the amount of valuable value given to the player.

  For example, if it is decided to transition to the special gaming state during the high probability state, in the gaming machine in which the high probability state is newly started after the special gaming state, the player starts the high probability state. It is hoped that the transition to the special gaming state will be decided at an early stage after the game has been made. According to the present invention, when the player's wish is fulfilled, in addition to this, the amount of valuable value is increased, so that the player is pleased twice. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transition to the special game state is made at a later stage after the high probability state is started, the player is disappointed because the amount of valuable value is small. On the other hand, since it has been decided that a high probability state will be newly started after the special gaming state, not only will it be discouraged, but also new hopes can be found. Thus, in the gaming machine in which the probability of winning the special gaming state in the lottery is the second probability until the game ball that has entered the high probability start area is guided by the ball guiding means to the high probability end area. It is possible to provide a new interest that corresponds to value and value. The “period” described in the claims means “time”.

<Characteristic G group> (Probability change period is set by the period until the total value of the points set in the selected fluctuation pattern is reached)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not it is correct, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, A dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode from a plurality of dynamic display modes, and a special game that is advantageous to the player when specific identification information is displayed on the display unit And a state setting means for setting a special state that is set higher than a predetermined probability of being a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, , The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is given total tabulation information unique to each dynamic display mode. Based on the determination of the dynamic display mode by the display mode determining means, the total information assigned to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired, and the total information and the total acquired so far A totaling means for determining, when the special state is set by the state setting means, a totaling determining means for determining the totaling information totaled by the totaling means; A gaming machine G1 having state switching setting means for setting the special state to be switched to the normal state when it is determined that the result is the result.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit from the plurality of dynamic display modes. When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit determination unit determines that the hit is higher than the predetermined probability of the normal state. Here, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is given total tabulation information that can be totaled for each dynamic display mode. Based on the determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination unit, the tabulation information given to the determined dynamic display mode is acquired by the tabulation unit. And the total information acquired so far is totaled by the totaling means. When the special state is set by the state setting means, the aggregation information aggregated by the aggregation means is discriminated by the aggregation discriminating means. When it is determined that the result determined by the total determination unit is a predetermined result, the state switching setting unit is set to switch the special state to the normal state. As a result, the special state is set until a predetermined result is obtained by the total discriminating means, so that the player can enjoy the game while predicting the current total result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1, the total information given to the dynamic display mode is configured by numerical information, and the total determination unit determines whether the total value of the numerical information is greater than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from a plurality of different dynamic display modes based on the result of the determination of the success / failure determination unit, Larger numerical information is included in the dynamic display mode that is likely to be determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit when the determination result of the determination unit is a determination result that is displayed with the specific identification information. A gaming machine G2 that is given as the aggregate information.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the aggregate information given to the dynamic display mode is configured by numerical information. The aggregation determining means determines whether the total value of the numerical information is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit value. The dynamic display mode determination unit determines one dynamic display mode from among a plurality of different dynamic display modes based on the result of the determination of the correctness determination unit. In the dynamic display mode that is easy to be determined when the determination result of the determination result by the dynamic display mode determination unit is a determination result that is displayed with specific identification information, larger numerical information is included as aggregate information. Has been granted. Therefore, when a dynamic display mode in which the determination result is easily displayed with specific identification information is selected, large numerical information is set, which is special in accordance with the player's expectation for jackpot. There is an effect that the remaining period of the state can be set to be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the counting unit starts counting based on the setting of the special state by the state setting unit, and the special state or the normal state is determined by the state setting unit. The gaming machine G3 is characterized by having initialization means for initializing the information collected by the counting means based on the setting.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, counting is started by the counting means based on the special state being set by the state setting means. Based on the setting of the special state or the normal state by the state setting means, the information collected by the counting means is initialized by the initialization means. Thereby, when the special state is started, counting can be started from the initialized state. Therefore, there is an effect that the special state can be set every time from the start of the special state until a predetermined count result is obtained.

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, and G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B8, C1 to C4, D1 to D4, E1 to E5, F1 to F9, G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as variation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that starts when a ball enters the starting entrance (start winning prize). For example, the effective display area has three horizontally or vertically, or 3 × 3 cells. A total of nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling stops, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. It is a thing that generates a jackpot when there is.
In addition, during the scrolling of symbols and the like, there are sometimes interesting effects (for example, effects by reach display, etc.) that suggest in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous to the player. A device has been devised to give players a sense of expectation for games. In addition, the reach display effect not only suggests that it will be a big hit, but whether or not the probability of a big hit after the big hit will be a high probability (high probability state) depending on the stop pattern when the scroll stops There are also gaming machines where the production is expected.
As for the high probability state (probability variation), there is a gaming machine in which the high probability state is maintained until the next jackpot is determined after the high probability state is started (so-called loop-type probability variation device). In this loop type probability changing machine, since the next jackpot is guaranteed in the high probability state, it can be a monotonous work until the game in the high probability state becomes the next jackpot. If the next jackpot is not achieved even if the fluctuating effects are repeated over a long period of time in a high probability state, the player repeats monotonous work, and there is a problem in that the player feels uncomfortable.
On the other hand, a game in which a high probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of fluctuating effects are finished after the high probability state is started, and a high probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of fluctuating effects are finished again after a big hit. There are also machines (so-called special time machines (ST machines)).
In this ST machine, the longest period from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state (hereinafter referred to as the “probable longest period”) is the end of a predetermined number of fluctuating effects. . As a result, the next jackpot is not guaranteed for the ST machine in the high probability state, and the player wants to continue the high probability state executed after the jackpot by hitting the jackpot again during the high probability state. And the discomfort given to the player due to the monotonous operation of the high probability game can be suppressed.
In addition, the ST machine is given a high probability state of the “probable longest period” again by making a big hit until a predetermined number of fluctuating effects that are “probable longest period” are executed. In other words, whether or not the jackpot can be repeated within a short period of “probable longest period” is an advantage of the ST machine that increases the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). No. 272159).
In a conventional gaming machine, a variation effect with a long variation time is set as a variation effect with high reliability of the jackpot. Since the player is playing a game in anticipation of a jackpot that is advantageous to him / her, even if the fluctuation time is long, the player wants to see a variation effect with high reliability of the jackpot.
However, if a variation effect with a large jackpot reliability and a long variation time is made multiple times, and if a big success is not made, the period for executing the variation effect of the predetermined number of times in the “probable longest period” becomes long, and the high probability state There was a problem that the period from the start until the jackpot was awarded becomes longer. Further, in a high probability state, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous and uncomfortable for the player if the time for executing the “probable longest period” is increased without causing a big hit. There was a problem.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a game becomes monotonous and a player gets bored with the game at an early stage. And
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a determination unit that executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a display unit that displays identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. And a dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means, and a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determining means. Based on the establishment of the change condition among the storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display time groups and the dynamic display time groups stored in the storage means, the dynamic display time determination means determines the dynamic display time. A group type changing means for changing the determined dynamic display time group; and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the display means; The success / failure judgment hand State setting means for setting a special state that is set to be higher than a predetermined probability that is a normal state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and by the state setting means, the state setting means Setting condition determining means for determining whether or not a setting condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed since the time when the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means after the special state is set, and the setting condition And a state switching setting means for setting the normal state based on the fact that the setting condition is determined by the determining means, and the dynamic display time group stored in the storage means includes other A short dynamic display time group is set, in which a dynamic display time that is shorter than the dynamic display time group is easily determined.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball and the game ball detected by the first detection means can be held at the first position. Holding means, moving means for moving the game ball held by the holding means from the first position to the second position while being held by the holding means, and after being moved to the second position by the moving means And a second detection means for detecting the moved game ball, wherein the state setting means sets the special state based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the group type changing means sets the short dynamic display time group to the change condition when the special state is set. When it is established, it can be selected.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination is performed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. Identification information indicating the determination result is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display time of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. A plurality of dynamic display time groups constituted by a plurality of different dynamic display times determined by the dynamic display time determination means are stored in the storage means. The dynamic display time group determined by the dynamic display time determining means is changed by the group type changing means based on the establishment of the change condition from among the dynamic display time groups stored in the storage means. Is done.
When specific identification information is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A special state is set by the state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, in which the probability that the hit determination unit determines that the hit is higher than the predetermined probability of the normal state. After the special state is set by the state setting means, the setting condition determining means determines whether the setting condition is satisfied after the total time of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means has elapsed for a predetermined time. Based on the determination that the setting condition is satisfied by the setting condition determining means, the normal state is set by the state switching setting means. A short dynamic display time group that is easier to determine a dynamic display time than other dynamic display time groups is set in the dynamic display time group stored in the storage unit.
Thereby, by setting the short dynamic display time group, the identification information can be dynamically displayed many times during the special state, and the game can be performed efficiently. Therefore, in a special state, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the game ball detected by the first detection means capable of detecting the game ball is held by the holding means at the first position. The game ball held by the holding means is moved by the moving means while being held by the holding means from the first position to the second position. After being moved to the second position by the moving means, the moved game ball is detected by the second detecting means. The state setting means sets the special state by the state setting means based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means. The setting condition determining means determines that the setting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second detecting means.
Thereby, the period during which the game ball moves can be set as the period during which the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the short dynamic display time group is changed to the group type changing means when the special state is set. Is selected when the change condition is satisfied, the number of identification information to be dynamically displayed during the period when the special state is set can be increased, and the game can be efficiently performed in the special state. .

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of display means )
S103 Benefits game execution means part S306 portion S942 group type change means some S908 dynamic display Period determining means some S901 discriminating means special state setting means

Claims (2)

A discriminating means capable of executing discrimination;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means;
Storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set;
The dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on establishment of a change condition from among the plurality of dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means. A group type changing means to be changed;
When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
Special state setting means for setting a special state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection unit capable of detecting the game ball after the bonus game is executed. In gaming machines,
When the special state is set, it has variable means that can be varied corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information ,
The variable means is formed with a holding portion capable of holding the detected game ball at the first position by the first detection portion, and the game ball held by the holding portion is moved from the first position to the second position. It is configured to be movable to a position while being held by the holding unit,
In the gaming machine, after the gaming ball moved to the second position in the state where the special state is set rolls out of the holding unit and the gaming ball is detected, the dynamic information of the identification information Normal state setting means capable of setting a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player over the special state when the display is stopped and displayed,
The dynamic display period group stored in the storage means is set with a short dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period shorter than other dynamic display period groups is easily determined. A gaming machine characterized by that.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images